0% found this document useful (0 votes)
17 views156 pages

Financial Management Module

The document is a course overview for an introductory Financial Management course aimed at entrepreneurs, covering fundamental concepts of business finance, investment, and financial calculations. It outlines the course goals, description, required readings, assignments, and assessment methods. The course integrates elements of financial accounting and management to equip managers with essential skills for project proposals and financial viability assessments.

Uploaded by

sike
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
17 views156 pages

Financial Management Module

The document is a course overview for an introductory Financial Management course aimed at entrepreneurs, covering fundamental concepts of business finance, investment, and financial calculations. It outlines the course goals, description, required readings, assignments, and assessment methods. The course integrates elements of financial accounting and management to equip managers with essential skills for project proposals and financial viability assessments.

Uploaded by

sike
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

 

FINANCIAL  MANAGEMENT  
Dr.  Gaofetoge  Ntshadi  Ganamotse  

Adeelah  Tariq    

Rapelang    D.Sekatle  

   

1  |  P a g e  
 
 
Financial  Management  

Dr.  Gaofetoge  Ntshadi  Ganamotse  

Adeelah  Tariq  

Rapelang  D.Sekatle  

Commonwealth  of  Learning    

Edition  1.0.  

____________________  

Commonwealth  of  Learning©  2013  

Any   part   of   this   document   may   be   reproduced   without   permission   but   with   attribution   to   the  
Commonwealth  of  Learning  using  the  CC-­‐BY-­‐SA  (share  alike  with  attribution).  

http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-­‐sa/3.0  

2  |  P a g e  
 
 

 
Commonwealth  of  Learning  

1055  West  Hastings  Street,  Suite  1200  

Vancouver,  British  Columbia  

Canada  V6E  2E9  

Telephone:  +1  604  775  8200  

Fax:  +1  604  775  8210  

Web:  www.col.org  

E-­‐mail:  [email protected]  

   

3  |  P a g e  
 
 

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS  

These   training   materials   have   drawn   so   much   from   the   available   literature.   The   commonwealth   of  
learning   extends   its   gratitude   to   the   many   authors   who   have   made   their   materials   available   through  
online  or  print  publication.  Many  thanks  to  Mr.  Sekatle,  who  has  initiated  the  writing  of  these  materials.  

   

4  |  P a g e  
 
 

TABLE  OF  CONTENTS  

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS  ............................................................................................................................  4  
COURSE  OVERVIEW  .................................................................................................................................  8  
Course  Introduction  .................................................................................................................................  8  
Course  Goals  ............................................................................................................................................  8  
Course  Description  ..................................................................................................................................  9  
Required  Readings  .................................................................................................................................  11  
Assignments  and  Projects  ......................................................................................................................  12  
Assessment  Methods  .............................................................................................................................  12  
Course  Schedule  ....................................................................................................................................  12  
STUDENT  SUPPORT  ................................................................................................................................  13  
Academic  Support  ..................................................................................................................................  13  
How  to  Submit  Assignments  ..................................................................................................................  13  
Technical  Support  ..................................................................................................................................  13  
UNIT  ONE  -­‐  INTRODUCTION  TO  FINANCIAL  MANAGEMENT  .................................................................  14  
Unit  1  Introduction  ................................................................................................................................  14  
Unit  1  Objectives  ...................................................................................................................................  14  
Unit  1  Readings  ......................................................................................................................................  14  
Unit  1  Assignments  and  Activities  .........................................................................................................  14  
Topic  1.1  Finance  and  Forms  of  Business  ..............................................................................................  15  
Topic  1.2  CONCEPTS  and  Principles  of  Financial  Management  .............................................................  20  
Unit  1  –  Summary  ..................................................................................................................................  27  
UNIT  Two  -­‐  FINANCIAL  INSTITUTIONS  AND  MARKETS  ...........................................................................  28  
Unit  2  Introduction  ................................................................................................................................  28  
Unit  2  Objectives  ...................................................................................................................................  28  
Unit  2  Readings  ......................................................................................................................................  28  
Unit  2  Assignments  and  Activities  .........................................................................................................  28  
Topic  2.1  Financial  Institutions  ..............................................................................................................  29  
Topic  2.2  FINANCIAL  Markets  ................................................................................................................  39  
Unit  2  –  Summary  ..................................................................................................................................  54  
UNIT  THREE  -­‐  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  .................................................................................................  55  

5  |  P a g e  
 
 
Unit  3  Introduction  ................................................................................................................................  55  
Unit  3  Objectives  ...................................................................................................................................  55  
Unit  3  Readings  ......................................................................................................................................  55  
Unit  3  Assignments  and  Activities  .........................................................................................................  56  
Topic  3.1  STATEMENTS  of  Comprehensive  Income  and  Financial  Position  ...........................................  57  
Topic  3.2  Analysis  of  the  Financial  Statements  ......................................................................................  69  
Topic  3.3  Statement  of  Cash  Flows  ........................................................................................................  82  
Unit  3  -­‐  Summary  ...................................................................................................................................  91  
UNIT  FOUR  -­‐  FINANCIAL  PLANNING  .......................................................................................................  92  
Unit  4  Introduction  ................................................................................................................................  92  
Unit  4  Objectives  ...................................................................................................................................  92  
Unit  4  Readings  ......................................................................................................................................  92  
Unit  4  Assignments  and  Activities  .........................................................................................................  92  
Topic  4.1  –  Introduction  to  Financial  Planning  ......................................................................................  93  
Topic  4.2  -­‐  Cash  Budgets  for  Cash  Planning  ...........................................................................................  95  
Topic  4.3  Pro  Forma  Financial  Statements:  A  Tool  For  Profit  Planning  ...............................................  103  
Unit  4  –  Summary  ................................................................................................................................  110  
UNIT  FIVE  -­‐  SHORT  TERM  FUNDS  MANAGEMENT  ...............................................................................  113  
Unit  5  Introduction  ..............................................................................................................................  113  
Unit  5  Objectives  .................................................................................................................................  113  
Unit  5  Readings  ....................................................................................................................................  113  
Unit  5  Assignments  and  Activities  .......................................................................................................  113  
Topic  5.1  –  Working  Capital  Management  ..........................................................................................  114  
Topic  5.2  –  Inventory  Management  .....................................................................................................  120  
Topic  5.3  –  Current  Liabilities  Management  ........................................................................................  127  
Unit  5  –  Summary  ................................................................................................................................  143  
FINAL  ASSIGNMENT/MAJOR  PROJECT  .................................................................................................  145  
COURSE  SUMMARY  .............................................................................................................................  146  
Topics  Learned  .....................................................................................................................................  146  
Application  of  Knowledge  and  Skill  ......................................................................................................  149  
Course  Evaluation  ................................................................................................................................  150  
COURSE  APPENDICES  ...........................................................................................................................  151  

6  |  P a g e  
 
 
 

   

7  |  P a g e  
 
 

COURSE  OVERVIEW  

COURSE  INTRODUCTION  

Financial   management   is   an   introductory   course   which   provides   the   applied   and   realistic  
view   of   financial   management   for   today’s’   entrepreneurs.   It   is   the   basis   of   fundamental  
concepts  of  business  finance,  investment  and  an  understanding  of  financial  calculations.  It  
sets  a  ground  understanding  of  the  elements  of  Financial  Management  in  an  Enterprise  by  
describing   the   corporation   and   its   operating   environment.   The   contents   of   this   course  
provide  the  understanding,  knowledge  and  essential  skills;  any  manager  should  have  when  
considering   proposing   project   and   assessing   its   financial   viability   and   impact   on   the  
business.    

The   course   integrates   elements   of   financial   accounting   and   financial   management.   The  
financial   accounting   focuses   on   key   financial   statements   such   as   Income   Statements,  
Balance   Sheets,   and   Cash   Flow   Statements,   and   their   roles   in   the   measurement   of  
performance   through   the   use   of   financial   and   non-­‐financial   measures.  Whereas,   the  
financial  Management  focuses  on  decision  making  associated  with  designing,  implementing  
and  managing  an  enterprise.  This  course  will  help  entrepreneurs  to  support  accounting,  risk  
management,   improve   operational   planning,   controls   and   decision   making.   Entrepreneurs  
will  be  able  in  order  to  impede  the  misuse  of  funds,  maximize  the  profit  and  wealth  of  the  
business  in  Long  Run.  In  addition  to  this,  the  course  along  with  other  courses,  e.g.,  business  
plan  development,  operations  management  etc,  in  program  provides  the  basis  for  further  
studies  related  to  finance  which  are  important  to  most  managerial  people.    

This   course   assumes   that   the   students   have   prior   accounting   knowledge   as   it   is   designed   to  
build   on   the   introduction   to   business   accounting,   business   planning   and   management  
accounting   courses.   However,   the   course   can   also   be   taken   by   those   who   have   basic  
practical  accounting  knowledge.  

COURSE  GOALS  

Upon  completion  of  the  financial  management  course  you  will  be  able  to:  

8  |  P a g e  
 
 
1. Understand    the  nature  of  finance  management  and  the  theoretical  and  conceptual  
underpinning  of  the  frameworks  for  the  financial  management  

2. Identify  the  nature,  characteristics  and  use  of  financial  statements    as  financial  reporting  
system  

3. Distinguish  between  financial  and  non-­‐financial  performance  measurement.  

4. Use  the  relevant  costs  for  decision  making,  particularly  pricing.    

5. Highlight  the  issues  in  the  determination  of  the  cost  of  products  or  services  and  activities  
and  the  implications  for  cost  control  and  pricing.    

6. Analyze  the  relationships  between  activity  cost,  volumes  and  profit,  and  their  role  for  
planning  and  decision  making  

7. Make  important  financing  and  investment  decisions  by    establishing  working  capital  
policies  

8. Recognize  the  impact  of  management  decisions  on  the  financial  health    of  a  business  

9. Employ  effective  financial  management  techniques  to  maximize  profit  and  wealth  of  the  
business.  
10. Understand   the   financial   planning   process,   including   strategic   and   short-­‐term   financial  
plans.  

COURSE  DESCRIPTION  

To   meet   the   above   course   objectives,   the   course   is   divided   into   5   units.   A   general   overview  
of   financial   management   is   introduced   in   Unit   1.   Financial   institutions   and   markets   are  
covered   in   unit   2.  The   different   types   of   financial   statements   are   examined   in   unit   3,   Unit   4  
covers   the   different   areas   of   financial   planning   whilst   unit   5   covers   financial   decision  
making.  The  valuation  and  capital  budgeting  issues  are  covered  in  unit  6.  Each  of  the  units  is  
further  subdivided  into  topics,  see  the  list  below.  Assessment  of  learning  is  provided  at  the  
end  of  each  topic  and  a  summative  assessment  of  each  unit  if  given  at  the  end  of  each  unit:  

9  |  P a g e  
 
 
Unit  1:  Introduction  to  Financial  Management  

Topic  1.1:  Finance  and  Forms  of  Business  

Topic  1.2:  Concepts  and  Principles  of  Management  

Unit  2  Financial  Markets  and  Institutions  

Topic  2.1:  Financial  Institutions  

Topic  2.2:  Financial  Markets  

Unit  3  Financial  Statements  

Topic  3.1:  Statements  of  Comprehensive  Income  and  Financial  Position    

Topic  3.2:  Analysis  of  the  Financial  Statements    

Topic  3.3:  Statement  of  Cash  flows  

Unit  4:  Financial  Planning  

Topic  4.1:  Introduction  to  Financial  Planning  

Topic  4.2  Cash  Budgets  for  Cash  Planning  

Topic  4.3  Pro-­‐forma  Financial  Statements:  A  tool  for  Profit  Planning  

Unit  5:  Financial  Decision  Making  

Topic  5.1:  Working  Capital  Management  

Topic  5.2:  Inventory  Management  

Topic  5.3:  Current  Liabilities  Management  

10  |  P a g e  
 
 

REQUIRED  READINGS  

Materials   relating   to   financial   Management   can   be   found   on   the   web,   as   well   as   in   the  
Library:    

1. Geoffrey,   A.   Hirt,   Bartley   R.   Danielsen   Stanley   B.   Block   (2009)   Foundations   of   Financial  


Management.    McGraw  Hill.  ISBN:  0073363774  /  0-­‐07-­‐336377-­‐4  
2. Brigham  F.  Eugene  and  Houston  F.  Joel  (2012)  Fundamentals  of  Financial  management.  
South-­‐  Western,  Cengage  Learning,  Ohio  IBN  13:  978-­‐0-­‐538-­‐47712-­‐3  
3. Chandra   Prassana   (2010)   Fundamentals   of   Financial   Management.   Tata   McGraw   Hill.  
New   Delhi   in  
http://books.google.co.uk/books?id=osy4UMOgpG4C&printsec=frontcover&dq=fUNDAME
NTALS+OF+FINANCIAL+MANAGEMENT,&hl=en&sa=X&ei=yJN_UZnaBMX5PLrDgdAD&sqi=2
&ved=0CFIQ6AEwAw  accessed  24/04/13  
4. Firer,   C.;   Ross,   S.;   Westerfield,   R.   and   Jordan,   B.   (2004).   Fundamentals   of  
Corporate  Finance.  McGraw  Hill,  New  York.  
5. International Accounting Standards Board (2009)   Presentation   of   Financial  
statements   in  http://www.iasplus.com/en/standards/standard5   accessed   23rd   April  
2013  
6. International Accounting Standards Board (2009) International Financial Reporting
Standard for Small and Medium-sized Entities (IFRS for SMEs) in
http://eifrs.iasb.org/eifrs/sme/en/IFRSforSMEs2009.pdf accessed 25/04/2013
7. Subramanyam,   K.R.   and   Wild   John.   J   (2009)   Financial   Statement   analysis,   10TH   Edition    
McGraw-­‐Hill   Irwin,     New   York.   –in   http://highered.mcgraw-­‐
hill.com/sites/dl/free/0073379433/597452/Subramanyam_fsa_sample_Ch01.pdf   accessed  
23/04/2013  
8. Stolowy,   H.   And   Lebas,   Michel   J.   (2002)   Corporate   Financial   Reporting   –   A   Global  
Perspective.  Thomson  Learning.  London.      
9. Dyson,   John   R.   (2010)   Accounting   for   non   accounting   Students.   Pearson   Education  
Limited.   Harlow.     In   http://web.kku.ac.th/chrira/Non%20Acct.%20Dyson.pdf   accessed  
26/04/2013  
10. Gitman,  Lawrence  J.  And  Chad  J.  Zutter  (2012)  Principles  of  managerial  finance,  13th  Ed.    
P.  cm.  The  Prentice  Hall    

11  |  P a g e  
 
 
11. Lorenzo   P,   Argentina   and   Allende,   Sarria   (2010)   Working   Capital   Management,   Oxford  
University  press  Inc.  
12. Brealey,   R.A;   Myers,   S.C;   Allen,   F.   (2006)   Principles   of   corporate   finance,   6th   Ed.    
dandelon.com  
13. Gitman,   Lawrence   J.   (2002)   Principles   of   managerial   finance,   10th   Ed.     P.   cm.   The  
Prentice  Hall    
14. Sagner,  James  (2011),  Essentials  of  Working  Capital  Management,  John  Wiley  and  sons.  
Inc  
15. Gitman,   Lawrence   J.   Web   Chapter   Financial   Markets   and   Institutions   available   at  
http://wps.aw.com/wps/media/objects/5448/5579249/FinancialMarketsandInstitutions.pd
f  

ASSIGNMENTS  AND  PROJECTS  

Assessment  of  learning  for  this  course  will  be  done  through  end  of  topic  activities,  end  of  
unit  activities  and  one  major  end  of  course  assignment.  The  end  of  topic  activity  is  designed  
to   reinforce   the   students   learning   at   the   end   of   the   topic   whilst   the   end   of   unit   tests   the  
attainment   of   the   course   objective   in   relation   to   a   specific   unit.   The   end   of   course  
assessment  requires  the  student  to  consolidate  all  the  knowledge  and  skills  acquired  from  
the  course.  This  will  be  developed  by  the  respective  institutions.  

ASSESSMENT  METHODS  

The  end  of  topic  and  end  of  unit  assessments  could  be  used  for  seminar  activities  by  your  
institution.     For   the   course   assessment,   participating   universities   could   provide   their  
students   with   financial   statements   from   companies   for   students   to   work   with   and   advise  
management   for   these   companies   accordingly.   This   could   either   be   a   group   project   or  
individual  project  depending  on  the  assessment  structure  of  the  participating  universities.  
An  end  of  year  examination  could  also  be  given  to  the  students.  

COURSE  SCHEDULE  

 This  course  is  designed  to  be  completed  within  12  to  16  weeks  of  the  final  year  of  a  degree  
in  entrepreneurship  programme.  

12  |  P a g e  
 
 

STUDENT  SUPPORT  

ACADEMIC  SUPPORT  

The   course   assumes   that   the   participating   institutions   would   have   within   their   structures,  
some  means  of  supporting  student  learning.  The  module  assumes  that  besides  the  normal  
lectures,   student   learning   will   be   facilitated   through   use   of   seminars,   designed   to   accord  
the   students’   time   to   work   through   the   activities   either   as   a   group   or   as   individuals.   Also,   it  
is   assumed   that   personal   tutorials   will   be   arranged   to   give   students   a   chance   to   reinforce  
their  learning  through  a  one  to  one  intervention  as  needed  by  students.    

The   student   handbook,   developed   by   the   respective   institutions,   will   provide   information  
with  regards  to  access  of  resources,  e.g.  library,  lecturer  and/or  facilitators.      

HOW  TO  SUBMIT  ASSIGNMENTS  

Submission   of   assignments   is   to   be   in   line   with   the   policies   and   guidelines   of   the   respective  
participating   institutions.   These   should   be   included   in   the   course   handbook,   to   facilitate  
motivation  of  student  learning.  

TECHNICAL  SUPPORT  

Where   appropriate,   the   participating   institutions   should   avail   the   course   lecture   slides   in  
online  sites  such  as  blackboard  or  Moodle.  Such  information  to  be  provided  in  the  course  
handbook.  

   

13  |  P a g e  
 
 

UNIT  ONE  -­‐  INTRODUCTION  TO  FINANCIAL  MANAGEMENT  

UNIT  1  INTRODUCTION  

The  unit  provides  a  general  overview  of  the  concept  of  financial  management.  The  students  
are  introduced  to  financial  management,  the  concepts  and  principles  used  within  the  scope  
of  the  subject.  The  important  concepts  are  defined.    

UNIT  1  OBJECTIVES  

Upon  completion  of  this  unit,  the  students  will  be  able  to:  

1. Differentiate  between  different  forms  of  businesses  and  explain  the  finance  implications  
for  each.  
2. Explain  the  concepts  and  principles  of  financial  management  
 

UNIT  1  READINGS  

To  complete  this  unit,  you  are  required  to  read  the  following  chapters:  

1. Geoffrey,  A.  Hirt,  Bartley  R.  Danielsen  Stanley  B.  Block  (2009)    
2. Brigham,  F.  Eugene  and  Houston,  F.  Joel  (2012)    -­‐  Chapter    1  
3. Chandra  Prassana  (2010)  Chapter  1  

UNIT  1  ASSIGNMENTS  AND  ACTIVITIES  

While  crude  end  of  topic  assessment  id  provided  in  this  course  to  assess  student  learning.  
The   end   of   the   participating   universities   will   develop   end   of   unit   assessment   is   to   be  
designed  by  the  participating  institutions.      

   

14  |  P a g e  
 
 

TOPIC  1.1  FINANCE  AND  FORMS  OF  BUSINESS  

TOPIC  1.1  INTRODUCTION  

When   deciding   on   which   form   of   ownership   to   go   for,   entrepreneurs   look   for   different  
considerations,   such   as   suitability,   legality   and   tax   implications.   There   are   three   main   forms  
of;   sole   proprietorship,   partnership   and   the   company;   however   there   is   an   extension   to   the  
company  which  is  the  close  corporation.  Each  of  these  has  advantages  and  disadvantages.  
The  most  influencing  factor  to  decisions  of  ownership  is  the  country’s  respective  company  
law/laws   of   incorporation.   The   nature   of   the   business   and   the   founding   structure   of   the  
business   calls   for   careful   management   of   the   finances   to   lead   to   the   achievement   of   the  
aspirations   of   the   owners,   which   is   growth.   Efficient   management   of   finance   entails,  
acquiring   and   investing   the   financial   resources   of   an   organisation   profitably.   This   topic  
introduces  financial  management  by  explaining  the  forms  of  businesses  and  implications  for  
finance  and  the  concepts  and  principles  of  financial  management  

TOPIC  1.1  OBJECTIVES  

Upon  completion  of  this  Topic  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Explain  the  nature  of  finance      

2. To  explain  the  forms  of  businesses  and  finance  implications  

FINANCE      

Finance  is  known  as  the  art  and  science  of  managing  money  finance  is  broad  and  dynamic  
field  and  it  directly  affects  the  lives  of  every  person  and  every  organization.  Every  individual  
and   organization   earns   or   raises   money   and   spends   or   invests   money.   Finance   is   concerned  
with  the  process,  institutions,  markets,  and  instruments  involved  in  the  transfer  of  money  
among  individuals,  businesses,  and  governments.  Basic  principles  of  finance,  such  as  those  
in  this  course,  can  be  universally  applied  in  business  organizations  of  different  types.  

15  |  P a g e  
 
 

FORMS  OF  BUSINESS  OWNERSHIP    

There  are  three  most  common  legal  forms  of  business  organization,  the  sole  proprietorship,  
the   partnership   and   the   corporation.   However   some   other   specialized   forms   of   business  
also   exist.   Among   the   business   organizations,   the   large   number   of   businesses   are   sole  
proprietorships.  However,  corporations  are  significantly  dominant  with  respect  to  receipts  
and  net  profits.    

S OLE   P ROPRIETORSHIP  
 A   sole   proprietorship   is   a   business   founded   and   owned   by   one   person.   It   is   the   simplest  
form  of  business  to  start  and  enjoys  less  government  regulation.  In  real  life  there  are  more  
sole   proprietorships   than   any   other   type   of   business   businesses   that   later   become   large  
corporations  start  out  as  small  sole  proprietorships.  

The   advantages   are   the   owner   of   a   sole   proprietorship   keeps   all   the   profits,   there   is   only  
one  person  to  make  decision  hence  quickening  the  decision  making  process,  there  is  also  no  
conflict   on   decisions   made.   Flexibility   is   enhanced   and   there   is   total   responsibility   and  
ownership   of   tasks   to   be   carried   out.   Above   all   the   owner   takes   all   the   profits.     However  
disadvantages   are;   the   owner   has   unlimited   liability   for   business   debt,   meaning   that  
creditors   can   look   to   the   proprietor’s   personal   assets   for   payment.   Because   there   is   no  
distinction   between   personal   and   business   income,   all   business   income   is   taxed   as   personal  
income,  there  is  no  sharing  of  ideas  on  decision  making  which  might  lead  to  less  efficient  
solutions.  The  owner  might  be  overloaded  and  overworked  because  he  has  no  one  to  help.  

The   life   of   a   sole   proprietorship   is   limited   to   the   owner’s   life   span   and   therefore   has   no  
continuity;  above  all  the  amount  of  capital  can  be  raised  by  a  sole  is  minimal  to  the  extent  
of   his   savings.   This   limits   the   business   from   exploiting   new   opportunities.   Ownership   of   a  
sole   proprietorship   may   be   difficult   to   transfer   since   this   requires   the   sale   of   the   entire  
business  to  a  new  owner,  (Firer  et  al.,  2004)  

P ARTNERSHIP  
A  partnership  is  a  kind  of  a  business  whereby  two  or  more  owners  join  together  as  partners  
to  co-­‐own  the  business.  The  partners  share  in  gains  or  losses  and  contribute  capital,  and  are  
responsible  for  achieving  the  goals  of  the  organisation.  We  will  have  to    understand  that  for  
partnership   to   start,   there   are   certain   arrangements   and   agreements   entered   into,   such   as,  

16  |  P a g e  
 
 
all  partners  might  be  liable  for  the  debts  of  an  organisation  (have  unlimited  liability  for  all  
partnership  debt)  this  happens  in  a    general  partnership1  

Because  partners  do  things  together,  in  should  be  tabulated  in  their  partnership  agreement  
as  to  how  they  contribute  as  well  and  their  profit/loss  sharing  ratios.  The  agreement  might  
be  informal  oral  agreement,  however  it  is  advisable  that  it  be  formalised  in  pen  and  paper  
for   ease   of   conflict   resolution.   In   a   limited   partnership,   one   or   more   partners   will   be  
involved  actively  in  running  the  business,  thereby  having  unlimited  liability,  while  some  of  
the  partners  will  not  participate  in  the  running  of  the  business  (sleeping  partners).  A  limited  
partner’s  liability  for  business  debts  is  limited  to  the  amount  that  partner  contributes  to  the  
partnership.  

The  advantages  of  a  partnership  are  that;  it  is  easy  to  form  and  inexpensive,  the  same  as  a  
sole  proprietorship.  The  capital  contributed  can  be  quite  substantial  as  compared  to  a  sole  
trader;   there   could   be   a   wide   array   of   ideas   in   decision   making   and   work   may   be   shared  
among   active   partners.   However   a   partnership   also   has   its   disadvantages;   its   lifespan   is  
limited,   because   when   a   partner   dies   the   partnership   has   to   be   dissolved.   Transfer   of  
ownership  by  a  general  partner  is  not  easy  because  the  partnership  has  to  be  dissolved  and  
new   one   must   be   formed.     Because   partners   act   for   and   on   behalf   of   the   partnership,  
decisions  taken  by  partners  render  other  partners  liable.  

Starting  a  partnership  means  people  intend  to  work  together  for  a  common  good,  it  goes  
without  saying  that  some  will  be  charged  with  certain  responsibilities  for  and  on  behalf  of  
other   partnership,   for   it   to   be   successful,   it   should   be   based   upon   trust   and   honesty.   A  
written  agreement  is  very  important  especially  if  it  spells  out  clearly  the  rights  and  duties  of  
the   partners;   it   helps   solve   misunderstandings   later   on.   Firer   et   al.   (2004)   argue   that   the  
primary   disadvantages   of   sole   proprietorships   and   partnerships   as   forms   of   business  
organization   are   (1)   unlimited   liability   for   business   debts   on   the   part   of   the   owners,   (2)  
limited   life   of   the   business,   and   (3)   difficulty   of   transferring   ownership.   These   three  
disadvantages   add   up   to   a   single,   central   problem:   The   ability   of   such   businesses   to   grow  
can  be  seriously  limited  by  an  inability  to  raise  cash  for  investment.  

 
                                                                                                                       
1
 http://www.myownbusiness.org/s4/  

17  |  P a g e  
 
 
C ORPORATION  
The   corporation   is   the   most   important   form   (in   terms   of   size)   of   business   organization   in  
most  countries.  It  is  considered  a  legal  “person”  separate  and  distinct  from  its  owners,  and  
it   has   many   of   the   rights,   duties,   and   privileges   of   an   actual   person.   Corporations   can  
borrow   money   and   own   property,   can   sue   and   be   sued,   and   can   enter   into   contracts.   A  
corporation   can   even   be   a   general   partner   or   a   limited   partner   in   a   partnership,   and   a  
corporation  can  own  stock  in  another  corporation  (Firer  et  al,  2004).  

 Starting  a  corporation  is  by  far  strenuous,  lengthy  and  more  complicated  than  starting  the  
other   forms   of   business   organization,   this   is   because   it   requires   the   preparation   of   the  
memorandum   of   association   as   well   the   articles   of   incorporation,   which   are   quite  
comprehensive   documents.   According   to   the   Company   Laws   of   various   countries   the  
articles   of   incorporation   must   contain   a   number   of   things,   including   the   corporation’s  
name,   its   intended   life   (which   can   be   forever),   its   business   purpose,   and   the   number   of  
shares  that  can  be  issued2.    

The   bylaws   are   rules   describing   how   the   corporation   regulates   its   own   existence.   For  
example,   the   bylaws   describe   how   directors   are   elected.   The   bylaws   may   be   amended   or  
extended   from   time   to   time   by   the   stockholders.   In   a   large   corporation,   the   stockholders  
and   the   managers   are   usually   separate   groups.   The   stockholders   elect   the   board   of  
directors,   who   then   select   the   managers.   Management   is   charged   with   running   the  
corporation’s   affairs   in   the   stockholders’   interests.   In   principle,   stockholders   control   the  
corporation  because  they  elect  the  directors.  As  a  result  of  the  separation  of  ownership  and  
management,   the   corporate   form   has   several   advantages.   Ownership   (represented   by  
shares  of  stock)  can  be  readily  transferred,  and  the  life  of  the  corporation  is  therefore  not  
limited.  The  corporation  borrows  money  in  its  own  name.  As  a  result,  the  stockholders  in  a  
corporation  have  limited  liability  for  corporate  debts.  The  most  they  can  lose  is  what  they  
have  invested.  The  relative  ease  of  transferring  ownership,  the  limited  liability  for  business  
debts,   and   the   unlimited   life   of   the   business   are   the   reasons   why   the   corporate   form   is  
superior  when  it  comes  to  raising  cash.  If  a  corporation  needs  new  equity,  it  can  sell  new  
shares   of   stock   and   attract   new   investors.   The   number   of   owners   can   be   huge;   larger  
corporations  have  many  thousands  or  even  millions  of  stockholders.    

                                                                                                                       
2
 http://highered.mcgraw-­‐hill.com/sites/dl/free/0072946733/301389/Ross_Sample_ch01.pdf  

18  |  P a g e  
 
 

TOPIC  1.1  SUMMARY  


This   topic   has   highlighted   the   importance   of   financial   management   for   the   various   forms   of  
business.   Whilst   financial   management   is   deemed   important   for   all   forms   of   companies,  
there   are   differences   in   the   requirements   for   financial   management   depending   on   the   type  
of  ownership  of  the  business.  

Self-­‐Reflection  Question          

How  is  the  finance  function  organised  in  the  different  forms  of  companies?                                                                                                                          

   

19  |  P a g e  
 
 

TOPIC  1.2  CONCEPTS  AND  PRINCIPLES  OF  FINANCIAL  MANAGEMENT  

TOPIC  1.2  INTRODUCTION  

Managers,   be   they   of   a   for-­‐profit   or   not-­‐for-­‐profit   companies   or   those   managing   large   or  


small   firms,   constantly   have   to   make   finance   related   decisions.   The   main   aim   of   such  
decisions  is  to  generate  value  to  the  owners  of  the  business  through  the  operations  of  the  
company.   People   who   are   responsible   for   such   role   in   a   company   are   said   to   be   performing  
a   financial   management   role.     This   topic   introduces   the   students   to   the   concept   of   financial  
management.   The   main   focus   of   financial   management,   the   role   of   the   finance   manager  
and  the  decisions  facing  those  charged  with  the  financial  management  responsibilities  are  
articulated.      

TOPIC  1.2  OBJECTIVES  

At  the  end  of  the  topic,  the  learners  will  be  able  to:  

1. Define  financial  management  


2. Explain  the  nature  of  the  finance  function  
3. Explain  the  role  of  a  financial  manager  in  an  organisation  

FINANCIAL  M ANAGEMENT  

Financial  management  is  concerned  with  decisions  on  assets  acquisition,  generation  of  the  
required   capital   to   acquire   the   necessary   assets   as   well   as   decisions   on   how   to   maximize.    
Shareholders/owners   value   through   the   operations   of   the   firm.   As   such,   financial   managers  
have  to  think  about  answering  these  basic  questions;  

1. What   long   term   investments   should   we   take   on?   The   kind   of   buildings,   materials,  
machinery  and  equipment  needed.  

2. Where   will   the   long   term   finances   to   pay   for   the   investments   are   acquired   from?   This  
will   involve   as   to   whether   the   entrepreneur   will   rely   on   savings   from   the   profits   made,  
borrow  from  external  sources  or  engage  in  more  owners  to  contribute  the  capital.  

20  |  P a g e  
 
 
3. How   do   we   intend   to   manage   the   day   to   day   financial   activities?   Such   as   collecting   from  
customers   and   paying   suppliers,   as   well   as   making   any   disbursements   concerning   the  
business.  

Assuming  the  manager  is  the  entrepreneur,  these  are  not  the  only  questions  that  s/he  will  
have   to   answer;   they   may   not   be   exhaustive,   however   these   are   some   of   the   most  
important.   Financial   management   therefore   deals   with   a   wide   range   of   issues   as   such;  
simply  put;  the  acquisition  of  funds  into  the  business  and  how  to  invest  those  funds  in  the  
best   possible   manner   to   ensure   organizational   growth   as   well   increasing   the   owners,  
wealth.   In   this   case   we   can   believe   in   an   organisation   someone   charged   with   these  
responsibility   is   fit   to   be   called   the   “Financial   Manager”,   let   us   now   look   at   what   the  
Financial  Manager  is.  

THE  FINANCE  FUNCTION  AND  ITS  ORGANIZATION  

People   in   different   areas   of   responsibility   within   the   business   interact   with   finance  
personnel   and   procedures   to   get   their   jobs   done.   In   order   to   make   useful   forecasts   and  
effective   decisions,   financial   personnel   must   be   willing   and   able   to   talk   to   individuals   in  
other  areas  of  the  firm.  Financial  management  function  can  be  broadly  described  by  taking  
into   consideration   its   role   within   the   organization,   its   relationship   to   economics   and  
accounting,  and  the  primary  activities  of  the  financial  manager.  

The   size   and   importance   of   the   financial   management   function   depend   on   the   size   of   the  
firm.  Financial  management  can  be  performed  by  the  accounting  department  in  small  firms.  
Whereas,  a  separate  finance  department  linked  directly  to  the  company  president  or  CEO  
through   the   chief   financial   officer   (CFO)   is   required   in   medium   to   large   firms.   The   lower  
portion   of   the   organizational   chart   in   Figure   1.1   represents   the   structure   of   the   finance  
function  in  a  usual  medium-­‐to-­‐large-­‐size  firm.  

The   treasurer   focus   tends   to   be   more   external   and   is   commonly   responsible   for   handling  
financial  activities,  such  as  financial  planning  and  fund  raising,  making  capital  expenditure  
decisions,   managing   cash,   managing   credit   activities,   managing   the   pension   fund,   and  
managing   foreign   exchange.   The   controller   focus   more   internal   and   typically   handles   the  

21  |  P a g e  
 
 
accounting  activities,  such  as  corporate  accounting,  tax  management,  financial  accounting,  
and  cost  accounting.  

FINANCIAL  MANAGEMENT  AND  ECONOMICS  


Financial   managers   must   have   an   understanding   of   the   economic   framework   such   as  
different   levels   of   economic   activity   and   changes   in   economic   policy.   The   financial  
managers  need  to  use  economic  theories  as  guidelines  for  efficient  business  operation  e.g.  
supply-­‐and-­‐demand   analysis,   profit-­‐maximizing   strategies,   and   price   theory   etc.   The   most  
important   economic   principle   used   in   financial   management   is   marginal   analysis,   which  
helps   managers   to   make   financial  decisions  and  take  actions,  only  when  the  added  benefits  
exceed  the  added  costs.    

FINANCIAL  MANAGEMENT  AND  ACCOUNTING  


Financial   management   and   accounting   activities   of   a   business   are   closely   related   and   are  
not   easily   distinguishable.   In   small   firms   the   controller   often   carries   out   the   finance  
function,   and   in   large   firms   many   accountants   are   closely   involved   in   various   finance  
activities.  However,  there  are  two  basic  differences  between  finance  and  accounting;  one  is  
related  to  the  emphasis  on  cash  flows  and  the  other  to  decision  making.  

E MPHASIS  ON   C ASH   F LOWS  


The   accounting   function   primarily   develops   and   reports   data   for   measuring   the  
performance   of   the   firm,   and   assessing   its   financial   position.   The   accountant   uses  
standardized  and  generally  accepted  principles  to  prepare  financial  statements  on  accrual  
basis.  

On   the   other   hand,   the   primary   emphasis   of   financial   manager   is   on   the   inflow   and   outflow  
of   cash   i.e.   cash   flows.   The   financial   manager   maintains   solvency   of   the   business   by  
planning  the  cash  flows  necessary  to  satisfy  its  obligations  and  to  acquire  assets  needed  to  
achieve   the   goals   of   the   business.   Regardless   of   its   profit   or   loss,   cash   basis   are   used   to  
recognize   the   revenues   and   expenses   only   with   respect   to   actual   inflows   and   outflows   of  
cash  to  make  sure  that  a  business  must  have  a  sufficient  flow  of  cash  to  meet  its  obligations  
as  they  come  due.    

22  |  P a g e  
 
 

Example:    

In  accounting  terms  Bamboo  limited  is  profitable,  but  in  terms  of  actual  cash  flow  it  is  
a   financial   failure.   Its   lack   of   cash   flow   resulted   from   the   uncollected   account  
receivable   in   the   amount   of   110,000.   Without   adequate   cash   inflows   to   meet   its  
obligations,  the  firm  will  not  survive,  regardless  of  its  level  of  profits.  As  the  example  
shows,  the  financial  manager  must  look  beyond  financial  statements  to  obtain  insight  
into  existing  or  developing  problems  because  the  accrual  accounting  data  do  not  fully  
describe   the   conditions   of   a   business.   However,   accountants   are   sensitive   to   the  
importance  of  cash  flows,  and  financial  managers  use  and  understand  accrual-­‐based  
financial  statements.  By  concentrating  on  cash  flows,  the  financial  managers  should  
be  able  to  avoid  insolvency  and  achieve  the  financial  goals.  

D ECISION   M AKING  
The   second   key   difference   between   finance   and   accounting   is   related   to   decision   making.  
Accountants  devote  their  attention  to  the  collection  and  presentation  of  financial  data.  On  
the  other  hands,  the  attention  of  financial  managers  is  devoted  to  evaluate  the  accounting  
statements,  develop  additional  data  and  make  decisions  on  the  basis  of  their  assessment  of  
the  associated  risks  and  returns.  This  does  not  mean  that  accountants  never  make  decisions  
or  that  financial  managers  never  gather  data.  Rather,  the  primary  focuses  of  accounting  and  
finance  are  distinctly  different.  

ROLE  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  MANAGER  

In   addition   to   financial   analysis   and   planning,   the   financial   manager’s   primary   activities  
include  making  investment  decisions  and  making  financing  decisions.  Investment  decisions  
determine   the   mix   and   the   type   of   assets   held   by   the   business.   Financing   decisions  
determine   the   mix   and   the   type   of   financing   used   by   the   business.   These   types   of   decisions  
can  be  viewed  in  terms  of  the  firm’s  balance  sheet,  as  shown  in  Error!  Reference  source  not  
found..  However,  the  decisions  are  actually  made  on  the  basis  of  their  cash  flow  effects  on  
the  overall  value  of  the  firm.  

23  |  P a g e  
 
 
Figure  1:    The  decisions  made  by  finance  managers  

Source:  Gitman  et  al.  (2012)  

As   mentioned   above,   as   companies   grow   and   become   owned   by   increased   numbers   of  


individuals/organizations  (shareholders),  the  owners  are  not  directly  involved  in  the  day  to  
day  decision  making  but  employ  managers  to  represent  their  interests  and  make  decisions  
on   their   behalf.   Therefore   the   financial   Manager   would   be   expected   to   answer   the  
questions  raised  above.  

The   roles   and   responsibilities   of   the   Financial   Manager   are   usually       associated   with   the   top  
officer   of   an   organization   for   example,   the   Financial   Director   or  the   Chief   Finance   Officer.    
The  adoption  of  organizational  structure  highlighting  the  financial  activities  within  a  firm  is  
shown  in  Figure  2.    

24  |  P a g e  
 
 
Figure  2:  An  organisational  structure  highlighting  the  role  of  the  financial  manager  

Chairman  of  
the  Board  

Managing  
Director  

Human   Financial  Director  


Resources   Markevng     Operavons  
Director   (Responsible  for   Director  
Director   Financial  Management)  

Treasurer     Controller    

Capital  
Expenditure   Cost  AccounZng  
Credit  Manager     Tax  Manager     Manger    
Manager  

Finacial  Palnning   Corporate   Finasncial  


Foregin  Exchange   and  Fund-­‐RAising   AccounZng   AccounZng  
Manager    
Manager     Manager     Manager    

Pension  Fund  
Cash  Manager     Manager  
 

Source:  Gitman  et  al.  (2012)  

The   activities   controlled   by   the   financial   director   include   managing   the   firm’s   cash   and  
credit,   the   financial   planning   and   capital   expenditure,   also   the   record   keeping   of   side   of   the  
company,  this  includes  cost  and  management  accounting,  and  management      information  
systems,  (Firer  et  al.,2004).  

TOPIC  SUMMARY  

Financial   management   forms   and   important   part   of   every   business   and   should   be   carried  
out  by  competent  managers.  The  three  areas  of  corporate  financial  management  we  have  
described—capital  budgeting,  capital  structure,  and  working  capital  management—are  very  
broad  categories.  Each  includes  a  rich  variety  of  topics,  and  we  have  indicated  only  a  few  of  
the  questions  that  arise  in  the  different  areas.  The  chapters  ahead  contain  greater  detail.  

25  |  P a g e  
 
 

Self-­‐Reflection  Question  

In  your  own  words,  describe  the  responsibilities  that  Financial  Managers  are  charged  
with  in  an  organisation  and  the  kind  of  decisions  that  they  have  to  make,  your  answer  
should  reflect  on  the  discussion  above.  

UNIT  1  REFERENCES  
1. Geoffrey,   A.   Hirt,   Bartley   R.   Danielsen   Stanley   B.   Block   (2009)   Foundations   of   Financial  
Management.    McGraw  Hill.  ISBN:  0073363774  /  0-­‐07-­‐336377-­‐4  
2. Brigham,  F.  Eugene  and  Houston,  F.  Joel  (2012)  Fundamentals  of  Financial  management.  
South-­‐  Western,  Cengage  Learning,  Ohio,    ISBN  13:  978-­‐0-­‐538-­‐47712-­‐3  
3. Chandra   Prassana   (2010)   Fundamentals   of   Financial   Management.   Tata   McGraw   Hill.  
New   Delhi   in  
http://books.google.co.uk/books?id=osy4UMOgpG4C&printsec=frontcover&dq=fUNDAME
NTALS+OF+FINANCIAL+MANAGEMENT,&hl=en&sa=X&ei=yJN_UZnaBMX5PLrDgdAD&sqi=2
&ved=0CFIQ6AEwAw  accessed  24/04/13  

26  |  P a g e  
 
 

UNIT  1  –  SUMMARY  
ASSIGNMENTS  AND  ACTIVITIES  

The  end  of  topic  assignments  have  been  employed  to  assess  student  learning  for  this  unit.  
Further   activities   could   be   incorporated   in   the   students’   assignments   that   are   to   be  
developed  by  the  respective  participating  institutions.  

SUMMARY  

The  topics  covered  in  this  unit  underscore  the  importance  of  financial  management  for  the  
various  forms  of  companies.    The  roles  of  finance  managers  in  an  organisation  have  been  
outlined.   The   financial   decisions   the   managers   have   to   make   in   order   to   realise   value   to  
stakeholders  from  the  operations  of  the  company  call  for  managers  to  be  more  analytical  in  
the  performance  of  their  day  to  day  finance  activities.    These  issues  are  covered  in  the  units  
that  follow.  

NEXT  STEPS  

Having   understood   the   basics   of   financial   management,   we   shall   now   explore   more  
important   avenues   in   an   organisation,   remember   that   activities   of   an   organisation   are  
recorded  and  reported,  we  will  therefore  look  at  the  various  reports  and  how  they  are  used  
in  an  organisation  to  make  economic  sense.  

   

27  |  P a g e  
 
 

UNIT  TWO  -­‐  FINANCIAL  INSTITUTIONS  AND  MARKETS  

UNIT  2  INTRODUCTION  
Financial   institutions   are   responsible   to   channel   the   savings   of   individuals,   businesses   and  
governments   into   loans   or   investments.   Financial   institutions   serve   its   users   as   the   main  
source  of  funds.  Majority  of  individuals  and  businesses  rely  heavily  on  funds  from  financial  
institutions,   in   the   form   of   loans   for   their   financial   support.   They   are   regulated   by  
regulatory   guidelines   from   governments   and   are   required   to   operate   within   these  
guidelines.     Financial   markets   are   the   intermediaries   that   facilitate   an   efficient   transfer   of  
resources   from   severs   to   who   need   for   them.   The   financial   markets   are   responsible   to  
contribute   in   economic   development   by   providing   channels   for   allocation   of   savings   to  
investment.    

UNIT  2  OBJECTIVES  
Upon  completion  of  this  unit  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Explain  how  financial  institutions  serve  as  intermediaries  between  investors  and  
firms.  
2. Explain  various  types  of  financial  institutions  and  how  they  work.  
3. Provide  an  overview  of  financial  markets.    
4. Explain  how  investors  and  business  firms  trade  money  market  and  capital  market  
securities  in  the  financial  markets  in  order  to  satisfy  their  needs.  
5. Identify  the  major  securities  exchanges.  
6. Understand  derivative  securities  and  explain  why  investors  and  firms  use  them.  
7. Describe  the  role  of  foreign  exchange  market.  

UNIT  2  READINGS  
 To  complete  this  unit,  you  are  required  to  read  the  following  chapters:  

Gitman,   Lawrence   J.   Web   Chapter   Financial   Markets   and   Institutions   available   at  


http://wps.aw.com/wps/media/objects/5448/5579249/FinancialMarketsandInstitutions.pd
f    

UNIT  2  ASSIGNMENTS  AND  ACTIVITIES  


(a)   Identify   the   major   financial   institutions   present   in   your   country   and   explain   the   major  
services  offered  by  them.    (Hint:  Identify  minimum  2  and  maximum  of  4  institutions.)  

(b)   Identify   a   major   organized   securities   exchange   in   your   country   and   explain   how   it   is  
different  from  a  organized  securities  exchange  in  a  foreign  country.    (Hint:  Difference  on  the  
basis  of  number  and  type  of  requirements  to  be  listed  on  a  securities  exchange  for  trading.)  

28  |  P a g e  
 
 

TOPIC  2.1  FINANCIAL  INSTITUTIONS  


 INTRODUCTION  
Financial   institutions   are   the   intermediaries   and   channel   the   savings   of   individuals,  
businesses   and   governments   into   loans   or   investments.   With   trillions   dollar   worth   of  
financial   assets   under   the   control   of   financial   institutions,   they   are   regarded   as   major  
players  in  the  financial  marketplace.  They  frequently  serve  businesses  and  individuals  as  the  
main   source   of   funds.   Some   financial   institutions   lend   the   money,   accepted   from  
customers’   savings   deposits,   to   other   customers   or   to   businesses   that   needs   them.  
Generally,  many  individuals  and  businesses  rely  heavily  on  funds,  in  the  form  of  loans,  from  
institutions  for  their  financial  support.  The  government  establishes  regulatory  guidelines  for  
financial  institutions  and  these  institutions  are  required  to  operate  within  these  guidelines.  

OBJECTIVES  
Upon  completion  of  this  topic  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Understand  how  different  financial  institutions  serve  as  intermediaries  between  


investors  and  firms.  
2. Identify  different  types  of  financial  institutions  and  the  services  provided  by  them.    

MAJOR  CUSTOMERS  OF  FINANCIAL  INSTITUTIONS  


The   major   suppliers   and   the   major   demanders   of   funds   to   and   from   financial   institutions  
are   individuals,   businesses   and   government.   The   large   portion   of   funds   in   financial  
institutions  are  provided  by  the  individual  consumers’  savings.  Individuals  not  only  are  the  
suppliers   of   the   funds   to   financial   institutions   but   are   also   the   demanders   of   funds   from  
financial   institutions   in   the   form   of   loans.   Although,   the   net   suppliers   for   financial  
institutions   are   individuals,   as   a   group   the   amount   of   money   saved   by  individuals   is   more  
than  what  they  borrow.  Also,  businesses  primarily  deposit  some  of  their  funds  in  checking  
accounts   with   various   commercial   banks   or   financial   institutions.   Businesses   also   borrow  
funds   from   financial   institutions   like   individuals,   but   businesses   are   considered   as   the   net  
demanders  of  funds.  The  amount  of  money  borrowed  by  businesses  is  more  than  what  is  
saved  by  them.  

Governments  are  another  customer  of  financial  institutions.  They  maintain  deposits  of  tax  
payments,   temporarily   idle   funds   and   Social   Security   payments   in   commercial   banks.  
Governments   do   not   borrow   funds   directly   from   financial   institutions,   although   they  
indirectly   borrow   from   them   by   selling   their   debt   securities   to   various   institutions.   The  
government  is  another  net  demander  of  funds  like  businesses  and  typically  borrows  more  
than  what  it  saves.  

There   are   different   types   of   financial   institutions   and   few   most   important   financial  
institutions  that  facilitate  the  flow  of  funds  from  investors  to  business  firms  are  commercial  

29  |  P a g e  
 
 
banks,   mutual   funds,   security   firms,   insurance   companies   and   pension   funds.   A   detailed  
discussion  of  each  of  these  financial  institutions  can  be  found  below.  

COMMERCIAL  BANKS  
Deposits  from  savers  are  accumulated  by  commercial  banks  and  are  used  to  provide  credit  
to   businesses,   individuals   and   government   agencies.   Thus   they   provide   service   to   the  
investors   who   desire   to   invest   funds   in   the   form   of   deposits.   Commercial   banks   provide  
personal  loans  to  individuals  and  commercial  loans  to  business  firms  by  using  the  deposited  
funds.   The   deposited   funds   are   also   used   to   purchase   debt   securities   issued   by   business  
firms  or  government  agencies.  Commercial  banks  serve  as  a  key  source  of  credit  to  facilitate  
expansion   of   businesses.   In   the   past,   commercial   banks   were   the   only   dominant   direct  
lenders   to   businesses.   However,   in   recent   years   other   types   of   financial   institutions   have  
begun   to   advance   more   loans   to   the   businesses.   The   objective   of   the   commercial   banks   are  
to  generate  earnings  for  their  owners  which  is  similar  to  most  other  types  of  business  firms.    

Generally,   the   commercial   banks   generate   earnings   by   receiving   a   higher   return   by   using  
their   funds   as   compared   to   the   cost   they   incur   from   obtaining   deposited   funds.   The   paid  
average   annual   interest   rate   on   the   obtained   deposits   is   usually   lower   than   the   rate   of  
return  earned  on  the  funds.  For  example,  a  bank  may  pay  an  average  annual  interest  rate  of  
3  percent  on  the  obtained  deposits  and  may  receive  a  return  of  8  percent  on  the  invested  
funds  as  loans  or  as  investments  in  securities.  Commercial  banks  can  charge  a  higher  rate  of  
interest   on   high   risk   loans,   however,   with   higher   risk   loans   they   are   more   exposed   to   the  
possibility  that  these  loans  will  default.    

The   traditional   and   very   important   function   of   commercial   banks   are   accepting   deposits  
and  using  those  funds  for  loans  or  to  purchase  debt  securities.  In  addition  to  this  function,  
banks   now   perform   many   additional   functions   as   well.   In   particular,   commercial   banks  
generate  fees  by  providing  services  such  as  foreign  exchange,  traveller’s  cheques,  personal  
financial   advising,   insurance   and   brokerage   services.   In   short,   the   commercial   banks   are  
able  to  offer  customers  one  stop  shopping  experience.  

S OURCES  AND   U SES  OF   F UNDS  AT   C OMMERCIAL   B ANKS    


Mainly,   most   of   the   funds   of   commercial   banks   are   obtained   by   accepting   deposits   from  
investors   (customers).   These   customers   of   commercial   banks   are   usually   individuals,   but  
some   of   them   are   firms   and   government   agencies   that   have   excess   cash.   Some   of   these  
deposits   are   held   at   banks   for   very   short   periods,   such   as   a   month   or   less   than   a   month.  
Commercial   banks   also   able   to   attract   deposits   for   longer   time   periods   by   offering  
certificates   of   deposit,   which   specify   a   minimum   deposit   level   e.g.   2,000   and   a   particular  
maturity   time   frame   (such   as   1   year   or   so).   Because   most   of   the   commercial   banks   offer  
certificates  of  deposit  with  various  different  maturities,  they  effectively  diversify  the  times  
at  which  the  deposits  are  withdrawn  by  investors.  

30  |  P a g e  
 
 
Deposits   at   commercial   banks   are   insured   up   to   a   certain   amount   by   an   independent  
agency   to   maintain   stability   and   public   confidence   e.g.   Federal   Deposit   Insurance  
Corporation   (FDIC)   in   United   States.   It   guarantee   the   safety   of   depositor's   accounts  in  
member  banks.  The  insurance  of  deposits  helps  to  reduce  the  fear  of  depositors  about  the  
possibility  of  a  bank’s  failure.  Therefore,  it  decreases  the  possibility  that  all  depositors  will  
try   to   withdraw   their   deposits   from   banks   simultaneously.   As   a   result   the   banking   system  
can  efficiently  facilitates  the  flow  of  funds  from  savers  to  borrowers.  

Most  of  the  funds  of  commercial  banks  are  either  used  to  provide  loans  or  to  purchase  debt  
securities.   In   both   of   the   cases   they   serve   as   creditors   that   provide   credit   to   those  
borrowers   who   need   funds.   Commercial   banks   provide   commercial   loans   to   businesses,  
make   personal   loans   to   individuals   and   purchase   debt   securities   issued   by   business   firms   or  
government  agencies.  Most  business  firms  rely  heavily  on  commercial  banks  as  a  source  of  
funds.  Some  of  the  commonly  known  means  by  which  commercial  banks  extend  credit  to  
businesses  are  term  loans,  lines  of  credit  and  investment  in  debt  securities  issued  by  firms.  
Term   loans   are   provided   by   banks   for   a   medium-­‐term   to   finance   the   investment   of   a  
business  in  machinery  or  buildings.  For  example,  consider  a  manufacturer  of  toy  trucks  that  
plans   to   produce   toys   and   sell   them   to   retail   stores.   The   manufacturer   will   need   funds   to  
purchase   the   machinery   for   producing   toy   trucks,   to   make   lease   payments   on   the  
manufacturing   facilities   and   to   pay   its   employees.   With   the   passage   of   time,   the   business  
will  generate  cash  flows  that  can  be  used  to  cover  mentioned  expenses.  However,  there  is  a  
time   lag   between   the   cash   outflow   (expenses)   and   cash   inflow   (revenue).   This   time   lag  
occurs   because   of   the   difference   in   time   when   the   business   must   cover   these   expenses   and  
when  it  receives  revenue.  The  term  loan  enables  the  business  to  cover  its  expenses  until  a  
sufficient  amount  of  revenue  is  generated.  

The  term  loan  on  an  average  lasts  for  a  medium-­‐term,  greater  than  3  years  and  less  than  10  
years,  such  as  4  to  8  years.  The  rate  of  interest  charged  by  the  bank  to  the  business  firm  for  
this  type  of  loan  depends  on  the  interest  rates  prevailing  in  the  market  at  the  time  the  loan  
is   provided.   The   adjustment   in   the   rate   of   interest   changed   on   term   loans   is   made  
periodically  e.g.  annually,  to  reflect  movements  or  changes  in  market  interest  rates.  

Another  form  of  credit  provided  by  commercial  banks  to  businesses  is  a  line  of  credit.  Line  
of  credit  allows  the  business  to  access  a  specified  amount  of  funds  over  a  specified  period  
of  time.  This  form  of  credit  provided  by  commercial  is  especially  useful  when  the  business  is  
uncertain  about  the  amount  of  borrowings  needed  over  a  given  period.   For  example,  if  the  
toy  truck  manufacturer  in  the  previous  example  was  unsure  about  its  expenses  in  the  near  
future,   it   has   an   option   to   obtain   a   line   of   credit   and   borrow   only   the   amount   that   it  
needed.  Once  a  line  of  credit  is  approved,  it  enables  the  business  to  acquire  funds  quickly.    
Line  of  credit  is  explained  in  greater  detail  later  in  the  text.  

Commercial  banks  also  invest  in  debt  securities  e.g.  bonds  that  are  issued  by  the  business  
firms.   The   arrangement   with   a   business   who   sell   the   security   to   a   commercial   bank   is  

31  |  P a g e  
 
 
typically   less   personalized   as   compared   to   when   a   bank   extends   a   term   loan   or   a   line   of  
credit.  For  example,  it  may  be  just  one  of  thousands  of  investors  who  invest  in  a  particular  
debt   security   issued   by   a   business   firm.   However,   we   recognize   that   credit   provided   by   a  
commercial  bank  to  business  firms  goes  beyond  the  direct  loans  that  it  provides  to  business  
firms,   because   it   also   includes   all   the   securities   purchased   that   were   issued   by   business  
firms.  

C OMMERCIAL   B ANKS  AS   F INANCIAL   I NTERMEDIARIES  


Commercial   banks   play   a   number   of   roles   as   financial   intermediaries.   First   and   foremost  
role  of  a  commercial  bank  is  to  repackage  the  deposits  received  from  investors  into  loans  
that   are   provided   to   business   firms.   In   this   manner,   small   size   deposits   by   individual  
investors   can   be   consolidated   and   channelled   in   the   form   of   large   size   loans   to   business  
firms.  It  is  difficult  for  the  individual  investors  to  achieve  this  by  themselves  because  they  
do  not  have  sufficient  information  about  the  business  firms  that  need  funds.  

Second,  banks  employ  credit  analysts  to  assess  the  creditworthiness  of  businesses  that  wish  
to  borrow  funds.  Individual  investors  who  deposit  funds  in  commercial  banks  are  generally  
not   capable   of   performing   this   task   and   would   prefer   that   the   commercial   bank   play   this  
role.  

Third,  commercial  banks  are  able  to  pool  the  funds  and  have  so  much  money  to  lend  that  
they   can   diversify   loans   across   several   borrowers.   In   this   manner,   the   commercial   banks  
increase   their   ability   to   absorb   individual   defaulted   loans   by   reducing   the   risk   that   a  
substantial  portion  of  the  loan  portfolio  will  default.  As  the  lenders,  they  accept  the  risk  of  
default.   Many   individual   investors   prefer   to   let   the   bank   serve   on   their   behalf   because   they  
would   not   be   able   to   absorb   the   loss   of   their   own   deposited   funds.   In   the   event   of   a  
commercial  bank  closure  due  to  excessive  amount  of  defaulted  loans,  the  deposits  of  each  
investor   are   insured   up   to   certain   amount   by   the   independent   agency   e.g.   FDIC   in   United  
States.   Therefore   the   commercial   bank   is   a   mean   by   which   funds   can   be   channelled   from  
small   investors   to   businesses   without   the   investors   having   to   engage   themselves   in   the   role  
of  lender.  

Fourth,  since  the  late  1980s  some  of  the  commercial  banks  have  been  authorized  to  place  
the  securities  that  are  issued  by  business  firms  by  serving  as  financial  intermediaries.  Such  
banks  who  act  as  financial  intermediaries  may  facilitate  the  flow  of  funds  to  businesses  by  
finding   investors   who   are   willing   to   purchase   the   debt   securities   issued   by   the   these  
businesses.  Therefore,  they  enable  firms  to  obtain  borrowed  funds  even  though  they  do  not  
provide  the  funds  themselves.  

R EGULATION  OF   C OMMERCIAL   B ANKS  


The   banking   system   is   regulated   by   the   Reserve   System   often   known   as   the   central   bank   of  
the   country.   The   central   bank   is   responsible   for   controlling   the   amount   of   money   in   the  
financial  system.  It  influences  the  operations  that  banks  conduct  by  imposing  regulations  on  

32  |  P a g e  
 
 
activities   of   banks.   Some   commercial   banks   are   members   of   the   central   bank   and   are  
therefore  subject  to  additional  rules  and  regulations.  

Commercial   banks   are   regulated   by   various   regulatory   agencies.   For   example   in   United  
States  first,  they  are  regulated  by  the  Federal  Deposit  Insurance  Corporation,  the  insurer  for  
depositors.  The  FDIC  wants  to  ensure  that  banks  do  not  take  excessive  risk  that  could  result  
in   failure   because   it   is   responsible   for   covering   deposits   of   banks.   The   FDIC   would   not   be  
able  to  cover  the  deposits  of  all  the  depositors,  in  case  several  large  banks  failed,  and  this  
could   result   in   a   major   banking   crisis.   Those   commercial   banks   that   apply   for   a   federal  
charter   are   known   as   national   banks   and   they   are   subject   to   regulations   of   the   Comptroller  
of  the  Currency.  As  all  national  banks  are  required  to  be  members  of  the  Federal  Reserve,  
they   are   also   subject   to   Federal   Reserve   regulations.   Alternatively,   banks   can   apply   for   a  
state  charter.  

The   common   philosophy   of   regulators   who   monitor   the   banking   system   is   to   encourage  
competition   among   banks   so   that   customers   will   be   charged   reasonable   prices   for   the  
services  that  are  offered  by  banks.  In  order  to  maintain  the  stability  of  the  financial  system,  
regulator  organization  also  attempt  to  limit  the  risk  of  banks.  

MUTUAL  FUNDS  
Mutual   funds   are   the   financial   institutions   that   sell   shares   to   individuals   and   generate  
funds.  They  pool  these  generated  funds  and  use  them  to  invest  in  securities.  Mutual  funds  
can  be  classified  into  three  broad  categories.    

1. Money  market  mutual  funds  


2. Bond  mutual  funds  
3. stock  mutual  funds  

Money   market   is   known   for   trading   short   term   securities.   Money   market   mutual   funds  
collect  and  pool  the  proceeds  from  individual  investors  to  invest  in  money  market  i.e.  short-­‐
term   securities   issued   by   business   firms   and   other   financial   institutions.   Bond   mutual   funds  
collect   and   pool   the   proceeds   from   individual   investors   to   invest   in   bonds,   where   as   the  
stock   mutual   funds   collect   and   pool   the   proceeds   from   investors   to   invest   in   stocks.  
Investment   companies   owns   the   mutual   funds.   Many   of   these   companies   e.g.   Fidelity  
International   have   created   various   types   of   money   market   mutual   funds,   bond   mutual  
funds  and  stock  mutual  funds  in  order  to  be  able  to  satisfy  various  different  preferences  of  
investors.  

R OLE  OF   M UTUAL   F UNDS  AS   F INANCIAL   I NTERMEDIARIES  


The  mutual  funds  finance  new  investment  by  firms,  when  they  use  money  from  investors  to  
invest   in   newly   issued   debt   or   equity   securities.   On   the   other   hand,   when   the   mutual   funds  
invest   in   debt   or   equity   securities   already   held   by   investors,   they   are   just   transferring  
ownership   of   the   securities   among   investors.   Mutual   funds   enable   individual   investors   to  

33  |  P a g e  
 
 
hold   diversified   portfolios   or   combinations   of   debt   securities   and   equity   securities   by  
pooling  small  investments  of  individual  investors.  

Mutual   funds   are   also   helpful   to   the   individuals   who   prefer   to   let   them   make   their  
investment   decisions   for   them.   The   returns   to   individual   investors   who   invest   in   mutual  
funds   are   tied   to   the   returns   earned   by   the   mutual   funds   on   their   investments.   To  
determine  which  debt  securities  to  purchase,  money  market  mutual  funds  and  bond  mutual  
funds   conduct   a   credit   analysis   of   the   firms   that   have   issued   or   will   be   issuing   those   debt  
securities.  Stock  mutual  funds  have  specific  investment  objectives  (e.g.  growth  in  value  or  
high   dividend   income)   and   to   satisfy   these   specific   objectives   they   invest   in   stocks.   Stock  
mutual  funds  have  potential  for  a  high  return,  given  the  risk  level  of  stock.  

The  reason  that  mutual  funds  usually  have  billions  of  dollars  to  invest  in  securities,  they  use  
large  amount  of  resources  to  make  their  investment  decisions.  In  general,  each  mutual  fund  
is   managed   by   one   or   more   portfolio   managers.   These   managers   are   responsible   for   the  
purchase   and   sale   of   securities   in   the   portfolio   of   funds.   These   managers   have   a   detailed  
information  about  the  business  firms  that  issue  the  securities  in  which  they  can  invest.  It  is  
possible   that   after   making   an   investment   decision,   mutual   funds   can   sell   any   securities   that  
are   not   expected   to   perform   well.   On   the   other   hand,   if   a   mutual   fund   has   made   a   large  
investment   in   a   particular   security,   the   portfolio   managers   of   mutual   fund   may   try   to  
improve  the  performance  of  the  security  rather  than  sell  it.  For  example,  a  mutual  fund  may  
hold  more  than  a  million  shares  of  a  particular  stock  that  has  performed  poorly.  Rather  than  
making   a   decision   to   sell   the   stock,   the   mutual   fund   may   attempt   to   influence   the  
management   of   the   business   firm   that   issued   the   security   in   order   to   boost   the  
performance  of  the  firm.  These  efforts  should  have  a  favourable  effect  on  the    stock  price  
of  the  firm.  

SECURITIES  FIRMS  
Securities   firms   are   financial   institutions   that   include   investment   banks,   investment  
companies   and   brokerage   firms.   Securities   firms   serve   as   financial   intermediaries   in   various  
different  ways.  First,  they  play  an  investment  banking  role  by  placing  securities  i.e.  stocks  
and  debt  securities,  issued  by  business  firms  or  government  agencies.  More  precisely,  they  
find  investors  who  want  to  purchase  these  securities.  Second,  securities  firms  at  times  serve  
as   investment   companies   by   creating,   marketing   and   managing   investment   portfolios.   A  
mutual  fund  is  an  example  of  an  investment  company.  Finally,  securities  firms  may  play  a  
role  as  brokerage  firm.  In  a  brokerage  firm  role  it  helps  investors  to  purchase  securities  or  
to  sell  securities  that  they  previously  purchased.  

 INSURANCE  COMPANIES  
Financial   institutions   that   provide   various   types   of   insurance   for   their   customers   are   known  
as   insurance   companies.   The   various   types   of   insurance   for   their   customers     include   life  
insurance,   property   and   liability   insurance   and   health   insurance.   They   periodically   receive  
payments   from   their   policyholders   which   are   known   as   premiums.   These   payments   are  

34  |  P a g e  
 
 
then  pooled  and  invested  until  these  funds  are  needed  to  pay  off  claims  of  policyholders.  
Insurance  companies  normally  use  the  funds  to  invest  in  debt  securities  issued  by  firms  or  
government  agencies.  They  also  invest  heavily  in  stocks  issued  by  business  firms.  This  way  
they  help  to  finance  corporate  expansion.  

Insurance   companies   also   employ   portfolio   managers.   These   managers   invest   the   funds  
that  result  from  pooling  the  premiums  of  their  customers.  An  insurance  company  may  have  
one   or   more   bond   portfolio   managers   who   determine   which   bonds   or   debt   security   to  
purchase,   and   one   or   more   stock   portfolio   managers   who   determine   which   stocks   to  
purchase.   The   main   objective   of   the   portfolio   managers   is   to   earn   a   higher   return   on   the  
portfolios  for  a  given  level  of  risk.  In  this  manner,  the  return  on  the  investments  not  only  
targets  to  cover  future  insurance  payments  to  policyholders  but  also  targets  to  generate  a  
sufficient   profit,   which   provides   a   return   to   the   owners   of   insurance   companies.   The  
performance   of   insurance   companies   is   greatly   dependent   on   the   performance   of   their  
bond  and  stock  portfolios.  

Like  mutual  funds,  insurance  companies  also  tend  to  purchase  securities  in  large  blocks,  and  
they   normally   have   a   large   stake   in   several   different   firms.   Thus   the   insurance   companies  
closely   monitor   the   performance   of   firms   in   which   they   have   invested.   Sometimes   they  
attempt  to  influence  the  management  of  a  firm  to  improve  the  performance  of  the  firm  and  
therefore  improve  the  performance  of  the  securities  in  which  they  have  invested.  

PENSION  FUNDS  
Pension   funds   are   financial   institutions   that   receive   payments   from   employees   and/or   their  
employers   on   behalf   of   the   employees,   and   then   invest   these   proceeds   for   the   benefit   of  
the   employees.   The   received   payments   of   pension   funds   are   called   contributions.   They  
typically  invest   in   debt  securities  or  bonds  issued   by  business  firms   or   government   agencies  
and   in   equity   securities   or   stock   issued   by   firms.   Like   other   financial   institutions   pension  
funds  also  employ  portfolio  managers  to  invest  and  manage  funds  that  result  from  pooling  
the  employee  or  employer  contributions.  They  have  bond  portfolio  managers  to  purchase  
bonds   and   stock   portfolio   managers   to   purchase   stocks.   The   reason   pension   funds   make  
large   investments   in   debt   securities   or   in   stocks   issued   by   firms,   they   closely   monitor   the  
firms  in  which  they  invest.  Same  as  mutual  funds  and  insurance  companies,  pension  funds  
may   periodically   attempt   to   influence   the   management   of   those   firms   to   improve   the  
performance  of  the  firm.  

SAVINGS  INSTITUTIONS    
Savings  institutions  are  financial  institutions  that  also  serve  as  an  important  intermediary.  
They   are   also   known   as   thrift   institutions   or   savings   and   loan   associations.   Savings  
institutions  accept  deposits  from  individuals  and  use  the  majority  of  these  deposited  funds  
to  provide  mortgage  loans  to  individuals.  The  participation  of  savings  institutions  is  critical  
in   financing   the   purchases   of   homes   by   individuals.   They   also   serve   as   intermediaries  
between  investors  and  business  firms  by  lending  these  funds  to  firms.  

35  |  P a g e  
 
 
 

FINANCE  COMPANIES    
Finance   companies   mainly   generate   funds   by   issuing   debt   securities   or   bonds.   Finance  
companies   lend   the   funds   to   individuals   or   firms   in   need   of   these   funds.   The   lending   of  
finance  companies  are  focused  on  small  businesses.  When  extending  these  loans,  they  are  
exposed  to  a  higher  level  of  risk  than  commercial  banks  that  borrowers  will  default  on  or  
will   not   pay   back   their   loans.     Therefore,   the   finance   companies   charge   a   relatively   high  
interest  rate  as  compared  to  commercial  banks.  

COMPARISON  OF  THE  KEY  FINANCIAL  INSTITUTIONS  


A   brief   comparison   of   the   most   important   types   of   financial   institutions   that   provide  
funding  to  firms  is  shown  in  Figure.  The  financial  institutions  differ  from  each  other  in  the  
manner   they   obtain   funds,   but     they   are   similar   in   terms   of   providing   credit   to   business  
firms   by   purchasing   debt   securities   or   bonds   the   firms   have   issued.   All   of   the   mentioned  
financial  institutions  except  commercial  banks  and  savings  institutions  also  provide  equity  
investment  by  purchasing  equity  securities  issued  by  business  firms.  

Figure  3:  How  Financial  Institutions  Provide  Financing  for  Firms  

 
Source:  Gitman  et  al.    (2012)  

Securities  firms  does  not  appear  in  Figure  1  because  they  are  not  as  important  in  actually  
providing   the   funds   needed   by   business   firms.   However,   they   play   an   essential   role   in  
facilitating  the  flow  of  funds  from  financial  institutions  to  business  firms.  In  fact,  each  arrow  
in  the  figure  representing  a  flow  of  funds  from  financial  institutions  to  business  firms  may  

36  |  P a g e  
 
 
have   been   facilitated   by   a   securities   firm   that   was   hired   by   the   business   firm   to   sell   its   debt  
or   equity   securities   e.g.   bonds   or   stock.   Securities   firms   sometimes   also   sell   the   debt   and  
equity   securities   to   individual   investors.   This   results   in   some   funds   flowing   directly   from  
individuals  to  business  firms  without  first  passing  through  a  financial  institution.  

CONSOLIDATION  OF  FINANCIAL  INSTITUTIONS  


In  recent  years  there  has  been  a  great  deal  of  consolidation  among  financial  institutions.  As  
a   result   of   this   consolidation   a   single   financial   conglomerate   may   own   every   type   of  
financial   institution.   Various   financial   conglomerates   offer   all   different   types   of   services  
including   commercial   banking   services,   investment   banking   services,   brokerage   services,  
mutual   funds   and   insurance   services.   They   also   have   a   pension   fund   and   manage   the  
pension   funds   of   other   companies   as   well.   An   example   of   a   financial   conglomerate   is  
Citigroup   Incorporation.   It   offers   commercial   banking   services   through   its   Citibank   unit,  
insurance   services   through   its   Travelers’   insurance   unit,   and   investment   banking   and  
brokerage  services  through  its  Salomon  Smith  Barney  unit.  

In   recent   years,   the   trend   of   mergers   and   acquisitions   has   made   it   possible   for   many  
commercial   banks   to   expand   their   offerings   of   financial   services   by   acquiring   or   merging  
with   other   financial   intermediaries   that   offer   other   financial   services.   Some   banks   even  
serve  in  advisory  roles  for  businesses  that  are  considering  the  acquisition  of  other  business  
firms.  As  a  result,  the  bank  expansion  is  mainly  focused  on  services  that  were  traditionally  
offered   by   securities   firms.   In   general,   the   expansion   of   banks   into   these   services   has  
facilitated  the  competition  and  it  is  expected  to  increase  the  competition  among  financial  
intermediaries.   This   increased   competition   therefore   has   led   to   lower   the   price   that  
individuals  or  business  firms  pay  for  these  services.  

GLOBALIZATION  OF  FINANCIAL  INSTITUTIONS  


In  recent  years,  financial  institutions  not  only  have  diversified  their  services  but  also  have  
expanded   internationally.   This   global   expansion   of   financial   institutions   was   stimulated   by  
various   factors.   First   and   foremost,   the   expansion   of   multinational   corporations   (MNCs)  
encouraged   commercial   banks   to   expand   and   serve   the   foreign   subsidiaries.   Second,   the  
commercial  banks  may  have  more  flexibility  to  offer  securities  services  and  other  financial  
services  outside  the  parent   country,   where   fewer   restrictions   are   imposed   on   commercial  
banks.  Third,  large  commercial  banks  acknowledged  that  they  could  take  advantage  of  their  
global  image  by  establishing  branches  in  foreign  countries/cities.  

Financial  institutions  located  in  foreign  countries  are  responsible  for  the  facilitation  of  the  
flow  of  funds  between  investors  and  the  business  firms  based  in  that  country.  During  the  
1997–1998  period,  a  large  number  of  Asian  firms  were  performing  poorly  and  were  cut  off  
from   funding   by   local   as   well   as   foreign   banks.   Before   this   time,   some   banks   had   been  
willing  to  extend  loans  to  these  Asian  firms  without  determining  requirement  and  feasibility  
of  funding.  The  crisis  helped  realize  some  foreign  banks  that  they  should  not  extend  credit  
to  firms  just  based  of  their  good  performance  during  the  mid-­‐1990s.  In  addition  to  that,  the  

37  |  P a g e  
 
 
crisis  also  caused  Asian  firms  to  realize  their  dependence  on  banks  to  run  their  businesses.  
As   a   result,   Asian   firms   are   now   expanding   more   cautiously,   because   they   have   to   justify  
their  request  for  additional  funding  (credit)  from  banks.  

TOPIC  SUMMARY  
Financial   institutions   channel   the   flow   of   funds   between   investors   and   business   firms.  
Individuals  deposit  funds  at  financial  institutions  such  as  commercial  banks,  they  purchase  
shares  of  mutual  funds,  they  purchase  insurance  protection  with  insurance  premiums  and  
they  make  contributions  to  pension  plans.  All  of  these  financial  institutions  provide  credit  to  
business  firms  by  purchasing  debt  securities.  In  addition  to  this,  all  of  the  above  motioned  
financial  institutions  except  commercial  banks  purchase  stocks  issued  by  business  firms.  

Self-­‐Reflection  Question                      

1. Distinguish  between  the  role  of  a  commercial  bank  and  that  of  a  mutual  fund.          

2. Which  type  of  financial  institution  do  you  think  is  most  critical  for  firms?                                                                                                          

38  |  P a g e  
 
 

 TOPIC  2.2  FINANCIAL  MARKETS  

TOPIC  2.2  INTRODUCTION  


Financial   markets   facilitate   an   efficient   transfer   of   resources   from   those   (individual   or  
business  firms,  government)  who  have  idle  resources  to  others  (individual  or  business  firms,  
government)   who   have   a   pressing   need   for   them   is   achieved   through.   More   precisely,  
financial  markets  provide  channels  for  allocation  of  savings  to  investment.  These  provide  a  
variety   of   assets   to   savers   as   well   as   various   forms   in   which   the   investors   can   raise   funds  
and   thereby   decouple   the   acts   of   saving   and   investment.   The   savers   of   the   resources   or  
funds   and   investors   are   constrained   not   by   their   individual   abilities,   but   by   the   ability   of  
economy   to   invest   and   save   respectively.   Therefore,   the   financial   markets   contribute   to  
economic   development   to   the   extent   that   the   latter   depends   on   the   rates   of   savings   and  
investment.      

TOPIC  2.3  OBJECTIVES  


Upon  completion  of  this  topic  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Provide  an  overview  of  financial  markets.    


2. Explain  how  firms  and  investors  trade  money  market  and  capital  market  securities  
in  the  financial  markets  in  order  to  satisfy  their  needs.  
3. Describe  the  major  securities  exchanges.  
4. Describe  derivative  securities  and  explain  why  firms  and  investors  use  them.  
5. Describe  the  foreign  exchange  market.  

TYPES  OF  MARKETS  


A   market   is   a   place   where   a   buyer   and   seller   interacts   and   make   exchange   of   goods.  
Financial   markets   are   very   important   for   business   firms   and   investors   because   they  
facilitate   the   transfer   of   funds   between   the   investors   who   wish   to   invest   and   firms   that  
need   to   obtain   funds.   Therefore,   in   a   financial   market   the   investors   are   the   sellers   the   fund  
obtainers   are   the   buyers   and   the   different   type   of   funds   are   regarded   as   goods.   Second,  
financial   markets   can   accommodate   the   needs   of   business   firms   who   wish   to   invest   their  
temporarily  excess  funds/savings.  Third,  they  can  accommodate  the  needs  of  investors  who  
wish  to  liquidate  their  investments  with  the  intention  of  spending  the  proceeds  or  investing  
them  in  alternative  investments.  

PRIMARY  MARKETS  VERSUS  SECONDARY  MARKETS  


Primary   market   is   a   market   where   debt   and   equity   securities   are   issued   by   firms.   Primary  
market  facilitates  the  issuance  of  new  securities.  The  offering  of  stock  to  the  public  for  the  
very   first   time   is   referred   as   an   initial   public   offering   (IPO).   Any   offering   of   stock   by   the   firm  
afterwards   is   known   as   a   secondary   offering.   Securities   can   be   sold   in   the   so-­‐called  
secondary  market,  by  investors  to  other  investors  after  they  have  been  issued  for  the  first  
time.  A  secondary  market  is  one  that  facilitates  the  trading  of  existing  securities.  

39  |  P a g e  
 
 
The  distinction  between  the  primary  market  and  the  secondary  market  can  be  made  with  
the  help  of  following  example.  

Example  –  Primary  Market  versus  Secondary  Market  

Kenton   Co.   was   established   in   July   1991.   It   enjoyed   success   as   a   private   limited  
business  firm  for   more  than   10   years,  but  it   could   not   grow   as   desired  because  of  a  
limitation  on   the   amount  of   loans  it  could  obtain  from  commercial  banks.  Kenton  
needed   a   large   equity   investment   from   other   firms   to   expand   its   business.   On  
March   14,   2002,   With   the   help   of   a   securities   firm,   it   engaged   in   an   initial   public  
offering.  it  issued  1  m illion  shares  of  stock  at  an  average  price  of  30  per  share.  Thus  
the   company   raised   a   total   of   30   million.   Later   the   investors   in   Kenton’s   stock  
decided  to  sell  the  stock.  They  then  used  the  secondary  market  to  sell  the  stock  of  
Kenton  Limited  to  other  investors.  The  secondary  market  activity  does  not  directly  
affect   the   amount   of   funds   available   to   Kenton   has   to   support   its   expansion  
because   Kenton   gets   no   additional   funds   when   investors   sell   their   shares   in   the  
secondary  market.  Kenton’s  expansion  over  the  next  several  years  was  successful,  
and   it   decided   to   expand   further.   By   this   time,   the   stock   price   of   Kenton   Limited  
was  near   60   per  share.  On  June   8,  2010,  Kenton  issued  another  1   m illion   shares   of  
stock   as   a   secondary   offering.   The   new   shares   were   sold   at   an   average   price   of   60,  
and   generated  60   million   for   Kenton   to  pursue  its   expansion   plans.   After   that   date,  
some  of  the  new  shares  as  well  as  IPO  shares  were  traded  in  the  secondary  market.      

PUBLIC  OFFERING  VERSUS  PRIVATE  PLACEMENT  


The  non-­‐exclusive  sale  of  securities  to  the  general  public  is  known  as  public  offering.  More  
precisely,   business   firms   raise   funds   in   the   primary   market   by   issuing   securities   through   a  
public  offering.  The  initial  public  offering  (IPO)  and  the  secondary  offering  by  Kenton  Co.  in  
the   earlier   example   were   public   offerings.   A   public   offering   is   usually   conducted   with   the  
help  of  a  securities  firm  (a  financial  institution)  that  provides  investment  banking  services.  
This  securities  firm  may  advise  the  issuing  firm  on  the  size  and  the  price  of  the  offering.  It  
may  also  agree  to  place  the  offering  with  investors  and  may  even  be  willing  to  underwrite  
the   offering,   which   means   that   it   guarantees   the   dollar   amount   to   be   received   by   the  
issuing  firm.  

As  an  alternative  to  a  public  offering,  business  firms  can  issue  securities  through  a  private  
placement.  Private  placement  is  the  sale  of  new  securities  directly  to  an  investor  or  group  
of  investors.  A  new  offering  of  securities  is  often  worth  40  to  100  million  or  may  be  more  
than  that,  thus  only  institutional  investors  e.g.  pension  funds  and  insurance  companies,  can  
afford   to   invest   through   private   placements.   The   major   advantage   of   a   private   placement   is  
that  it  avoids  fees  charged  by  securities  firms  for  placing  the  stock.  However,  some  business  

40  |  P a g e  
 
 
firms   prefer   to   pay   for   the   advising   and   underwriting   services   of   a   securities   firm   over   a  
private  placement.  

MONEY  MARKETS  VERSUS  CAPITAL  MARKETS  


Money  markets  are  the  financial  markets  that  facilitate  the  flow  of  short-­‐term  funds  only.  
By  short  term  we  mean  funds  with  maturities  of  1  year  or  less  than  1  year.  The  securities  
that   are   traded   in   money   markets   are   referred   to   as   money   market   securities.   To   obtain  
funds   for   a   short   period   of   time,   business   firms   commonly   issue   money   market   securities  
for   purchase   by   investors.   Business   firms   may   also   consider   purchasing   money   market  
securities   with   temporarily   available   cash.   Similarly,   investors   purchase   money   market  
securities   with   funds   that   they   may   soon   need   for   other   more   profitable   investments   in   the  
near  future.  

In  contrast  to  money  markets,  financial  markets  that  facilitate  the  flow  of  long-­‐term  funds  
i.e.   the   funds   with   maturities   of   more   than   1   year   are   known   as   capital   markets.   The  
instruments  that  are  traded  in  capital  markets  are  referred  to  as  securities.  As  stocks  do  not  
have   maturities   and   can   provide   long-­‐term   funding,   thus   they   are   classified   as   capital  
market   securities.   Business   firms   generally   issue   stocks   and   bonds   to   finance   their   long-­‐
term   investments   in   corporate   operations.   These   securities   are   purchased   by   institutional  
and  individual  investors  who  have  funds  that  they  wish  to  invest  for  a  long  time.  

INTERNATIONAL  CAPITAL  MARKETS  

B OND   M ARKETS  
Eurobond   market  is  the  oldest  and  largest  international  bond  market  where  corporations  
and   governments   normally   issue   bonds   i.e.   Eurobonds,   denominated   in   dollars.   For  
example,   A   U.S.   Corporation   might   issue   bonds   denominated   in   dollars   that   would   be  
purchased  by  investors  in  any  of  the  European  countries.  Eurobond  market  is  appreciated  
by  issuing  firms  and  governments  because  it  allows  them  to  attract  a  much  large  number  of  
investors  than  would  generally  be  available  in  the  local  market.  

Foreign   bond   market  is  another  international  market  which  is  for  long-­‐term  debt  securities.  
A   foreign   bond   is   a   type   of   bond   issued   by   a   foreign   corporation   (MNC)   or   government   and  
is  denominated  in  the  investor’s  home  currency  and  sold  in  the  investor’s  home  market.  A  
bond   issued   by   a   U.S.   company   that   is   denominated   in   pound   sterling   and   sold   in   United  
Kingdom   is   an   example   of   a   foreign   bond.   As   compared   to   Eurobond   market,   the   foreign  
bond  market  is  much  smaller  but  many  issuers  have  found  this  to  be  an  attractive  way  of  
tapping  debt  markets  in  Japan,  Germany,  Switzerland  and  the  United  States.  

41  |  P a g e  
 
 
I NTERNATIONAL  EQUITY  MARKET    
Finally,   there   is   a   recently   emerged   vibrant   international   equity   market.   This   market   has  
made  it  possible  for  many  corporations  to  sell  blocks  of  shares  to  investors  in  a  number  of  
different   countries   at   the   same   time.   These   market   facilities   enable   the   corporations   to  
raise   far   large   amounts   of   capital   than   they   can   raise   in   any   single   national   market.  
International  equity  sales  plays  an  essential  role  for  governments  who  wants  to  sell  state-­‐
owned   companies   to   private   investors,   because   the   companies   being   privatized   are   often  
extremely  large.  

TYPES  OF  MARKET  SECURITIES  

Securities  are  generally  classified  in  two  different  types  namely,  money  market  securities  or  
capital  market  securities.    

K EY   M ONEY   M ARKET   S ECURITIES  


Money  market  securities  are  highly  liquid  securities,  which  means  that  a  major  loss  in  their  
value,   they   can   be   easily   converted   into   cash   without.   This   is   very   important   to   business  
firms   and   investors   who   may   need   to   sell   the   money   market   securities   on   a   moment’s  
notice   in   order   to   use   their   funds   for   other   more   profitable   purposes.   The   money   market  
securities   used   by   firms   and   investors   mainly   includes   Treasury   bills,   commercial   paper,  
negotiable  certificates  of  deposit  and  foreign  money  market  securities.    

T REASURY   B ILLS  
To   explain   the   treasury   bills   in   the   text   U.S   treasury   bills   are   considered   as   example.   U.S.  
Treasury   issues   treasury   bills   as   short-­‐term   debt   securities.   Treasury   bills   are   issued   on  
every  Monday  in  two  maturities,  i.e.  13  weeks  and  26  weeks,  whereas,  Treasury  bills  with  
one   year   maturity   are   issued   once   a   month.   An   auction   process   is   used   by   the   Treasury  
when  issuing  the  securities  and  competitive  bids  are  submitted  by  1:00  p.m.  eastern  time  
on   every   Monday.   Firms   and   investors   who   are   willing   to   pay   the   average   accepted   price  
paid  by  all  competitive  bidders  can  also  submit  non-­‐competitive  bids.  The  Treasury  always  
has   a   plan   for   amount   of   money   to   be   raised   every   Monday.   First,   it   accepts   the   highest  
competitive  bids  and  continues  accepting  the  lower  bids  until  it  has  obtained  the  amount  of  
desired  funds.  

The   par   value   which   is   the   principal   to   be   paid   at   maturity   on   Treasury   bills   is   minimum  
10,000,  but  the  treasury  bill  purchased  by  firms  and  institutional  investors  typically  have  a  
much  higher  par  value.  Treasury  bills  they  are  sold  at  a  discount  from  the  par  value  when  
they   are   issued.   The   difference   between   the   par   value   and   the   discount   is   the   return   of  
investor.   Treasury   bills   do   not   pay   coupon   or   interest   payments   but   instead   pay   a   yield  
equal  to  the  percentage  difference  between  the  sale  price  and  the  purchase  price.  

Firms   and   investors   who   wish   to   have   quick   access   to   funds   if   needed   are   the   common  
demanders   of   Treasury   bills.   Treasury   bills   are   highly   liquid   because   there   is   an   active  

42  |  P a g e  
 
 
secondary   market   in   which   previously   issued   Treasury   bills   are   sold.   Treasury   bills   are  
perceived   as   free   from   the   risk   of   default   because   they   are   backed   by   the   federal  
government   and   regarded   as   risk-­‐free   security.   Therefore,   the   rate   of   return   that   can   be  
earned  from  investing  and  holding  a  Treasury  bill  until  maturity  is  commonly  referred  to  as  
a   risk-­‐free   rate.   Investors   are   sure   about   the   exact   return   they   can   earn   by   holding   a  
Treasury  bill  until  maturity.  

Example  –  Treasury  Bills  

Marcos   Ltd.   purchased   a   1-­‐year   Treasury   bill   with   a   par   value   of   200,000   and   paid  
188,000   for   it.   If   it   holds   the   Treasury   bill   until   maturity,   then   the   return   for   the   period  
will  be    equal  to  6.38%  [(200,000-­‐188,000)  ÷  188,000]  

The   return   is   uncertain   if   Marcos   Ltd   plans   to   hold   the   Treasury   bill   for   60   days   and  
then  sell  it  in  the  secondary  market.  The  return  will  depend  on  the  selling  price  of  the  
Treasury   bill   in   the   secondary   market   60   days   from   now.   Assume   that   Marcos   Ltd  
expects   to   sell   the   Treasury   bill   for   190,000.   Therefore   its   expected   return   over   this  
time  period  would  be  equal  to  1.064%  [(190,000-­‐188,000)  ÷  188,000]  

Returns   earned   by  investing   in   m oney   m arket   securities   are   generally   measured   on   an  


annualized   basis.   It   can   be   done   by   multiplying   the   return   by   365   (days   in   a   year)  
divided   by   the   number   of   days   the   investment   is   held   by   the   investor.   In   the   given  
example,  the  expected  annualized  return  is  equal  to  6.47%.  

190,000   −  188,000   365


! × !  
188,000 60

In  the  given  example  there  is  uncertainty  because  the  investor  firm  is  not  planning  to  
hold   the  Treasury   bill  until   m aturity.   If  Marcos   Ltd  planned  to  take  a   risk-­‐free  position  
for  the  60  days  period,  it  could  purchase  a  Treasury  bill  in  the  secondary  market  with  
60   days   remaining   until   maturity.   For   example,   suppose   that   Marcos   Ltd   could  
purchase   a   Treasury   bill   that   had   60   days   until   maturity   and   had   a   par   value   of  
200,000  and  a  price  of   198,000.  The  annualized  yield  that  would  be  earned  in  this  case  
is  equal  to  6.14%.  

200,000   −  198,000   365


! × !  
198,000 60

 
 

 
 

43  |  P a g e  
 
 
C OMMERCIAL   P APER  
A   short-­‐term   debt   security   issued   by   well-­‐known   and   creditworthy   firms   is   referred   to   as  
commercial  paper.  It  provides  the  business  firm  an  alternative  to  a  short-­‐term  loan  from  a  
bank.  Some  of  the  business  firms  issue  their  commercial  paper  directly  to  investors  whereas  
others  rely  on  financial  institutions  to  facilitate  the  placement  of  the  commercial  paper  with  
investors.   The   minimum   denomination   of   a   commercial   paper   is   200,000,   although  
multiples   of   1   million   is   the   more   common   denominations.   Typically,   the   maturities   are  
between  20  and  45  days  but  they  can  be  as  long  as  270  days.    

Commercial   paper   is   not   as   liquid   as   Treasury   bills   are,   because   commercial   paper   does   not  
have   an   active   secondary   market   to   resell   it.   Therefore,   the   investors   who   purchase  
commercial   paper   usually   plan   to   hold   it   until   maturity.   Commercial   papers   are   issued   at  
discount  and  do  not  pay  coupon  or  interest  payments  like  Treasury  bills.  The  total  expected  
return   to   investors   is   based   exclusively   on   the   difference   between   the   selling   and   the  
buying  price.  There  is  a  possibility  that  the  firm  that  issued  commercial  paper  will  default  on  
its  payment  at  maturity,  therefore,  investors  require  a  higher  return  on  commercial  paper  
as   compared   to   return   expected   from   risk-­‐free   (Treasury   bills)   securities   with   a   similar  
maturity.  

N EGOTIABLE   C ERTIFICATES  OF   D EPOSIT  


Debt   securities,   which   are   issued   by   financial   institutions   to   obtain   short-­‐term   funds,   are  
referred   to   as   negotiable   certificate   of   deposit   (NCD).   The   minimum   denomination   of   a  
negotiable   certificate   of   deposit   (NCD)   is   typically   100,000,   but   the   1   million  denominations  
are  more  common.  Commonly  NCDs  have  maturities  of  10  days  to  365  days  (1  year).  Unlike  
the   other   money   market   securities   discussed   earlier,   negotiable   certificate   of   deposits  
(NCDs)   do   provide   interest   payments.   The   secondary   market   for   NCDs   exists,   but   it   is   not  
very   active   as   the   secondary   market   for   Treasury   bills.   Investors   require   a   return   on   a  
negotiable   certificate   of   deposit   that   is   slightly   above   the   return   on   Treasury   bills   with   a  
similar  maturity  because  of  the  risk  that  the  financial  institution  issuing  a  NCD  will  default  
on  its  payment  at  maturity.    

F OREIGN   M ONEY   M ARKET   S ECURITIES  


Foreign   money   markets   are   assessable   to   firms   and   investors   who   wish   to   borrow   or   invest  
funds   for   short-­‐term   periods.   Short-­‐term   securities   such   as   commercial   papers   can   be  
issued   by   business   firms   in   foreign   markets,   assuming   that   they   are   perceived   as  
creditworthy   in   those   foreign   markets.   Firms   and   investors   can   also   attempt   to   borrow  
short-­‐term   funds   in   foreign   currencies   by   issuing   short-­‐term   securities   denominated   in  
those   currencies.   The   major   reason   for   a   firm   or   an   investor   to   borrow   in   foreign   money  
markets  is  to  obtain  funds  in  a  currency  that  matches  its  cash  flows.  For  example,  European  
subsidiary   of   IBM   may   borrow   Euros   which   is   the   currency   for   11   different   European  
countries   either   from   a   bank   or   by   issuing   commercial   paper   to   support   its   European  
operations,  and  it  will  use  future  cash  inflows  in  Euros  to  pay  off  this  debt  at  maturity.  

44  |  P a g e  
 
 
Investors   may   invest   in   foreign   short-­‐term   securities   because   they   have   future   cash  
outflows   in   those   currencies.   For   example,   say   a   firm   has   excess   funds   that   it   can   invest   for  
three   months.   If   it   needs   Canadian   dollars   to   purchase   exports   in   3   months,   it   may   invest   in  
a  3-­‐month  Canadian  money  market  security  (such  as  Canadian  Treasury  bills)  and  then  use  
the   proceeds   at   maturity   to   pay   for   its   exports.   Alternatively,   an   investor   may   purchase   a  
foreign   money   market   security   to   capitalize   on   a   high   interest   rate.   Interest   rates   vary  
among   countries,   which   causes   some   foreign   money   market   securities   to   have   a   much  
higher   interest   rate   than   others.   However,   investors   are   subject   to   exchange   rate   risk   when  
investing  in  securities  denominated  in  a  different  currency  from  what  they  need  once  the  
investment   period   ends.   If   the   currency   denominating   the   investment   weakens   over   the  
investment  period,  then  the  actual  return  that  investors  earn  may  be  less  than  what  they  
could  have  earned  from  domestic  money  market  securities.  

KEY  CAPITAL  MARKET  SECURITIES  


Bonds  and  stocks  are  the  major  capital  market  securities.  

B ONDS  
Bonds   are   long-­‐term   debt   securities   and   are   used   by   business   firms   and   governments.  
Business   firms   and   governments   issue   bonds   to   raise   large   amounts   of   long-­‐term   funds.  
Bonds  are  distinguished  by  their  issuer  and  can  be  classified  as  Treasury  bonds,  municipal  
bonds  or  corporate  bonds.  

T REASURY   B ONDS    
Treasury   bonds   are   a   mean   of   obtaining   funds   for   a   long-­‐term   period   and   are   issued   by   the  
United  States  Treasury.  The  treasury  bonds  normally  have  maturities  ranging  between  10  to  
30  years.  As  discussed  previously,  the  Treasury  issues  short-­‐term  debt  securities  in  the  form  
of   Treasury   bills   and   medium-­‐term   debt   securities   in   the   form   of   Treasury   notes.   Their  
maturities  range  between  1  and  10  years.  

The  minimum  denomination  of  Treasury  bonds  is  1,000,  but  more  common  denominations  
are   much   larger.   The   federal   government   in   United   States   borrows   most   of   its   funds   by  
issuing  Treasury  securities.  Treasury  bonds  have  an  active  secondary  market,  so  it  is  easier  
for   investors   to   sell   Treasury   bonds   at   any   time.   The   interest   on   Treasury   bonds   are   paid   to  
the   investors   who   hold   them,   in   the   form   of   coupon   payments   every   6   months   or   semi-­‐
annually.  Investors  who  invest  in  treasury  bonds  earn  a  return  in  the  form  of  these  coupon  
payments   as   well   as   in   the   difference   between   the   selling   and   the   purchase   price   of   the  
bond.  

A  Treasury  bond  with  a  par  value  of  1,000,000  and  a  6  percent  coupon  rate  pays  60,000  per  
year,  which  is  divided  into  30,000  after  the  first  six  month  period  of  the  year  and  another  
30,000  in  the  second  six  month  period  of  the  year.  Interest  earned  by  investors  on  Treasury  
bonds  is  exempt  from  state  and  local  income  taxes.  

45  |  P a g e  
 
 
Treasury  bonds  are  backed  by  the  federal  government,  therefore,  the  return  to  an  investor  
who   holds   these   bonds   until   maturity   is   known   with   certainty.   The   coupon   payments   on  
holding   a   treasury   bond   are   known   with   certainty,   and   so   is   the   payment   at   maturity   which  
is  the  par  value.  As  a  result,  the  return  that  is  expected  to  be  earned  on  a  Treasury  bond  is  
commonly  referred  to  as  a  long-­‐term  risk-­‐free  rate.  The  annualized  return  guaranteed  on  a  
10-­‐year  bond  today  provides  the  annualized  risk-­‐free  rate  of  return  over  the  next  10  years,  
whereas,  the  annualized  return  that  is  promised  on  a  20-­‐year  Treasury  bond  provides  the  
annualized  risk-­‐free  rate  of  return  over  the  next  20  years.  If  investors  want  to  earn  a  risk-­‐
free  return  over  a  specific  period  that  is  not  available  on  newly  issued  Treasury  bonds,  then  
in   that   case   they   can   purchase   a   Treasury   bond   available   in   the   secondary   market   with   a  
time  remaining  until  maturity  that  matches  their  desired  investment  period.  

Municipal   Bonds   Municipal   bonds,   in   United   States,   are   the   type   of   bonds   issued   by  
municipalities  to  support  their  expenditures.  They  are  commonly  classified  into  one  of  two  
categories.  

The  two  common  types  are  the  General  obligation  bonds  and  the  revenue  bonds.  General  
obligation   bonds   are   a   mean   to   provide   investors   with   interest   and   principal   payments   that  
are   backed   by   the   municipality’s   ability   to   tax.   On   the   other   hand,   revenue   bonds   are   a  
mean  to   provide   investors   with   interest   and   principal   payments   by   using   funds   generated  
from  the  project  financed  with  the  proceeds  of  the  bond  issue.  For  instance,  a  municipality  
may  issues  revenue  bonds  to  build  a  toll  way.  To  make  interest  and  principal  payments  to  
the   investors   who   purchased   these   revenue   bonds,   municipality   would   be   using   proceeds  
received  in  the  form  of  tolls.  The  minimum  denomination  of  these  types  of  bonds  is  5,000;  
however  larger  denominations  are  more  common.  

The  interest  on  municipal  bonds  is  paid  on  a  semi-­‐annual  (6  months)  basis.  The  interest  paid  
on   these   bonds   is   generally   exempt   from   federal   income   taxes   and   may   even   be   exempt  
from   state   and   local   income   taxes.   This   feature   of   municipal   bonds   is   very   attractive   and  
enables   municipalities   to   obtain   funds   at   a   low   cost.   Because   the   investors   tend   to   be   more  
concerned   with   the   after-­‐tax   return,   they   are   willing   to   accept   a   lower   pre-­‐tax   return   on  
municipal   bonds.   A   secondary   market   for   Municipal   bonds   does   exist,   but   that   secondary  
market  is  less  active  than  the  secondary  market  for  Treasury  bonds.  As  a  result,  municipal  
bonds  are  less  liquid  as  compared  to  Treasury  bonds  that  have  a  similar  term  to  maturity.  

Corporate   Bonds   Corporations   issue   corporate   bonds   to   finance   their   investment   in   long-­‐
term   assets,   such   as   buildings   and   machinery.   The   standard   denomination   of   corporate  
bonds   is   1,000,   but   at   times   other   denominations   are   issued   as   well.   Corporate   bonds  
issued  in  high  volume  have  more  active  secondary  market.  Similar  to  the  municipal  bonds  
there  is  less  active  secondary  market  for  corporate  bonds  than  there  is  for  Treasury  bonds;  
therefore,   corporate   bonds   are   less   liquid   than   Treasury   bonds   with   a   similar   term   to  
maturity.   Corporate   bonds   have   maturities   of   normally   ranging   between   10   and   30   years,  

46  |  P a g e  
 
 
but   at   times   they   have   maturities   of   50   years   or   more.   For   instance,   in   past   Coca-­‐Cola  
Company  and  Disney  issued  bonds  with  maturities  of  100  years.    

I NTERNATIONAL   B ONDS    
Many  business  firms  issue  bonds  in  the  international  markets  e.g.  firms  in  United  States  can  
issue   bonds   in   Eurobond   market.   Issuing   bonds   in   Eurobond   market   serves   issuers   and  
investors   in   bonds   denominated   in   a   variety   of   currencies.   For   instance,   General   Motors  
may   consider,   issuing   a   dollar-­‐denominated   bond   to   investors   in   the   Eurobond   market   or  
issuing   a   bond   denominated   in   Japanese   yen   to   support   its   business   operations   in   Japan.  
Investors  from  United  States  may  purchase  bonds  denominated  in  other  currencies  in  the  
Eurobond  market  that  are  paying  higher  coupon  rates  than  dollar-­‐denominated  bonds.  But  
these  investors  will  be  subject  to  exchange  rate  risk  if,  in  the  future,  they  plan  to  convert  
the  coupon  and  principal  payments  into  dollars.  

 
Example  –  International  Bond  
  A  microprocessor  manufacturer  just  issued  a  20  -­‐  year  bond  with  12%  coupon  
interest   rate   and   a   1,000   par   value.   It   pays   interest   on   a   semi-­‐annual   basis.  
 
Investors   who   invest   in   this   bond   have   a   contractual   right  to   receive   (1)   annual  
interest   of   120   (12%   ×   1000),   distributed   at   the   end   of   each   6   months   as   60  
 
(1/2  ×  120)  for  20  years,   and  also  (2)  at  the   end  of  year  20,  the   1,000  which  is  
  the  par  value.  

S TOCKS  
An   equity   security   which   represents   ownership   interest   in   the   issuing   firm   is   regarded   as  
Stock.   Bonds   are   issued   by   both   governments   and   businesses,   but   stock   is   issued   only   by  
business  firms.  The  two  available  types  of  stock  are  common  stock  and  preferred  stock.  

C OMMON  STOCK    
Shares   of   common   stock   are   units   of   ownership   interest,   or   equity   in   a   business   firm.   A  
return   is   earned   by   common   stockholders   either   in   the   form   of   dividends,   by   realizing   gains  
through  increases  in  share  price  or  both.    

P REFERRED   S TOCK  
 It  is  a  special  form  of  ownership  in  a  business  firm.  Preferred  stock  has  features  of  both  a  
bond   and   common   stock.   A   fixed   periodic   dividend   is   promised   to   preferred   stockholders  
and   this   fixed   dividend   must   be   paid   prior   to   any   dividends   payment   to   the   common  
stockholders.   In   other   words,   preferred   stockholders   have   priority   over   common  
stockholders  when  the  dividends  of  the  business  firms  are  disbursed.  

I NTERNATIONAL   S TOCKS  
 Large   business   firms   commonly   issue   stock   in   international   equity   markets.   These   firms  
may  be  able  to  easily  sell  all  of  their  stock  offering  by  placing  some  of  the  offered  stock  in  

47  |  P a g e  
 
 
foreign  markets,  if  there  is  not  sufficient  demand  in  the  home  country.  In  addition  to  this,  
by  selling  some  of  their  newly  issued  stock  in  foreign  markets  firms  may  be  able  to  increase  
their  global  name  recognition  in  countries  where  they  conduct  business.  

Investors  usually  invest  in  stocks  issued  by  foreign  firms  because  of  the  belief  that  price  of  a  
particular  foreign  stock  is  undervalued  in  the  foreign  market.  Another  belief  is  that  a  foreign  
country   has   much   greater   potential   economic   growth   as   compared   to   the   home   country.  
Investors   may   also   invest   in   foreign   stocks   to   achieve   international   diversification.   To   the  
extent   that   most   stocks   of   firms   are   highly   influenced   by   the   economy   of   the   country,  
Investors  can  reduce  their  exposure  to  potential  weakness  in  the  economy  by  investing  in  
foreign   firms’   stocks   whose   performance   is   insulated   from   economic   conditions   of   home  
country.  

SECURITIES  EXCHANGE  

Securities   exchange   is   a   marketplace   where   business   firms   (sellers   of   securities)   can   raise  
funds   through   the   sale   of   new   securities   and   investors   (purchasers   of   securities)   can  
maintain   liquidity   by   being   able   to   resell   them   easily   when   required.   Securities   exchanges  
are   commonly   known   as   “stock   markets”.   The   label   “stock   market”   is   somewhat   misleading  
because   bonds,   common   stock,   preferred   stock   and   a   variety   of   other   investment  
instruments  are  traded  on  these  exchanges.  The  securities  exchanges  are  classified  into  two  
major  types  i.e.  the  organized  securities  exchange  and  the  over-­‐the-­‐counter  market.  

O RGANIZED   S ECURITIES   E XCHANGES  


Tangible   organizations   that   act   as   secondary   markets   where   outstanding   securities   are  
resold  are  referred  to  as  organized  securities  exchanges.  The  largest  organized  exchange  in  
the  United  States  is  the  New  York  Stock  Exchange  (NYSE).  In  Canada,  the  largest  organized  
exchange  is  the  Toronto  Stock  Exchange.  Major  European  examples  of  organized  securities  
exchanges   include   the  Amsterdam   Stock   Exchange,  London   Stock   Exchange,  Paris   Bourse  
and  the  Frankfurt  Stock  Exchange.  Nigerian  Stock  Exchange,  JSE  Limited,  are  the  examples  
in   Africa.   In   Asia,   examples   include   the  Singapore   Exchange,   the   Tokyo   Stock   Exchange,  
the  Hong   Kong   Stock   Exchange,   the  Shanghai   Stock   Exchange   and   the  Bombay   Stock  
Exchange.  In  Latin  America,  there  are  such  exchanges  as  the  BM&F  Bovespa  and  the  BMV.  
Australia   has   a   national   stock   exchange,   the  Australian   Securities   Exchange.   The   regional  
securities   exchange   also   exist,   e.g.   in   United   States,   the   Chicago   Stock   Exchange   and   the  
Pacific  Stock  Exchange  (located  in  Los  Angeles  and  San  Francisco).    

Majority   of   organized   exchanges   are   modeled   after   the   New   York   Stock   Exchange   (NYSE).  
The   New   York   Stock   Exchange   (NYSE)   accounts   for   approximately   90   percent   of   the   total  
annual  dollar  volume  of  shares  traded  on  organized  exchanges.  An  individual  or  a  business  
firm  must  own  a  ‘seat’  on  the  exchange  to  make  transactions  on  the  ‘floor’  of  the  securities  
exchange.  Most  of  the  seats  on  the  securities  exchange  are  owned  by  brokerage  firms.  To  
be  listed  on  an  organized  exchange  for  trading,  a  firm  must  file  an  application  and  meet  a  

48  |  P a g e  
 
 
number  of  requirements.  For  example,  to  be  eligible  for  listing  on  a  securities  exchange,  a  
firm  must  have  at  certain  number  of  stockholders,  each  owning  certain  number  of  shares,  a  
certain   minimum   amount   of   shares   of   publicly   held   stock,   a   certain   demonstrated   before  
taxes  earning  power  at  the  time  of  listing  and  a  certain  before  taxes  earning  power  for  each  
of   the   preceding   time   interval   (2   year   or   so),   required   net   tangible   assets,   and   a   certain  
amount  in  market  value  of  publicly  traded  shares.    

Transactions   are   made   on   the   floor   of   the   exchange   through   an   auction   process.   By   making  
transaction  we  mean  trading  and  the  goal  of  trading  is  to  give  both  purchasers  and  sellers  
the   best   possible   deal   by   filling   buy   orders   (orders   to   purchase   securities)   at   the   lowest  
possible   price   and   sell   orders   (orders   to   sell   securities)   at   the   highest   possible   price.   The  
common   procedure   for   placing   and   executing   an   order   can   be   explained   by   a   simple  
example.    

Example  –  Organized  Securities  Exchanges  

Norman   Blake,   who   has   an   account   with   one   of   the   financial   management   and  
advisory   companies,   wishes   to   purchase   100   shares   of   the   IBM   Corporation   at   the  
prevailing   market   price.   Norman   calls   her   account   executive,   Howard   Kohn   of  
financial   management   and   advisory   company,   and   places   his   order.   Howard  
immediately   has   the   order   transmitted   to   the   headquarters   of   the   financial  
management   and   advisory   company,   which   immediately   forwards   the   order   to   the  
clerk   of   financial   management   and   advisory   company   on   the   floor   of   the   securities  
exchange.   The   clerk   dispatches   the   order   to   one   of   the   seat   holders   of   firm   (IBM  
Corporation),   who   goes   to   the   appropriate   trading   post,   executes   the   order   at   the  
best  possible  price  and  returns  to  the  clerk.  The  clerk  then  wires  the  execution  price  
and   confirmation   of   the   transaction   back   to   the   brokerage   office.   Howard,   is   then  
given   the   relevant   information,   who   passes   it   along   to   Norman.   To   complete   the  
transaction  Howard  then  does  certain  paper  work.  
 

An   order,   either   to   buy   or   to   sell,   can   be   executed   in   seconds   once   it   is   placed,   thanks   to  
modern   sophisticated   telecommunications   devices.   Information   on   the   daily   trading   of  
securities  is  reported  in  various  media,  including  financial  publications.  

T HE   O VER -­‐ THE -­‐C OUNTER   E XCHANGE  


Intangible   market   for   the   purchase   and   sale   of   securities   not   listed   by   the   organized  
exchanges  are  referred  to  as  over-­‐the-­‐counter  (OTC)  exchange  or  market.  Traders  known  as  
dealers  match  the  forces  of  supply  and  demand  for  securities  to  determine  the  market  price  
of  over-­‐the-­‐counter  (OTC)  securities.  For  example,  in  United  States  OTC  dealers  are  linked  
with  the  purchasers  and  sellers  of  securities  through  the  National  Association  of  Securities  
Dealers   Automated   Quotation   System   (NASDAQ),   which   is   a   sophisticated  
telecommunications  network.    

49  |  P a g e  
 
 
The   OTC   dealer   provides   current   “bid   prices”   and   “ask   prices”   on   thousands   of   actively  
traded  OTC  securities.  The  highest  price  offered  by  a  dealer  to  purchase  a  given  security  is  
referred   to   as   bid   price,   and   the   lowest   price   at   which   the   dealer   is   willing   to   sell   the  
security   is   referred   to   as   the   ask   price.   As   a   result,   the   dealer   adds   securities   to   his/her  
inventory  by  purchasing  them  at  the  bid  price  and  in  order  to  earn  profit  from  the  spread  
between  the  bid  and  ask  prices,  the  dealer  sells  securities  from  his  or  her  inventory  at  the  
ask   price.   The   trading   in   OTC   market   is   different   from   auction   process   on   the   organized  
securities   exchanges.   The   prices   at   which   OTC   securities  are  traded  in  the  OTC  market  are  a  
result   of   both   competitive   bids   and   negotiation.   Besides   creating   a   secondary   (re-­‐sale)  
market  for  outstanding  securities,  the  OTC  market  also  acts  like  a  primary  market  in  which  
all  new  public  issues  are  sold.  

DERIVATIVE  SECURITIES  MARKETS  

Derivative   Securities   are   financial   contracts   whose   values   are   derived   from   the   value   of  
underlying  financial  assets  (e.g.  securities).  Derivative  securities  are  also  called  derivatives.  
The   value   of   each   derivative   security   tends   to   be   related   to   the   value   of   the   underlying  
financial  asset  in  a  manner  that  is  understood  by  business  firms  and  investors.  As  a  result,  
derivative   securities   allow   individual   investors   and   business   firms   to   take   positions   in   the  
securities   on   the   basis   of   their   expectations   of   movements   in   the   underlying   financial  
assets.   Specially,   investors   usually   speculate   on   expected   movements   in   the   value   of   the  
underlying   financial   asset   without   having   to   actually   purchase   the   financial   asset.   In  
majority   of   cases,   a   speculative   investment   in   the   derivative   can   generate   a   much   higher  
return  as  compared  to  the  same  investment  in  the  underlying  financial  asset.  On  the  other  
hand,  this  type  of  investment  will  also  result  in  a  much  higher  level  of  risk  for  the  investors.  

Derivative   securities   are   not   just   used   to   take   speculative   positions   but   also   to   hedge   or  
reduce  exposure  to  risk.  For  instance,  business  firms  that  are  negatively  affected  by  interest  
rate  movements  can  take  a  particular  position  in  derivative  securities  that  can  balance  the  
effects  of  movements  in  interest  rate.  Derivative  securities  can  reduce  its  risk  by  reducing  
the  exposure  of  a  firm  to  some  external  force.  Derivative  securities  are  used  by  some  of  the  
investors   to   reduce   the   risk   of   their   investment   portfolio.   For   example,   the   investors   can  
take   a   particular   position   in   derivatives   to   protect   themselves   against   an   anticipated  
temporary  decline  in  the  bonds  or  the  stocks  they  own.  Derivative  securities  are  only  traded  
on   special   exchanges   and   through   sophisticated   telecommunications   systems.   Financial  
institutions,   for   example,   commercial   banks   and   securities   firms   match   up   buyers   and  
sellers  to  facilitate  the  trading  of  derivative  securities.  

THE  FOREIGN  EXCHANGE  MARKET  

The   market   that   allows   for   the   purchase   and   sale   of   currencies   to   facilitate   international  
purchases  of  products,  services  and  securities  is  regarded  as  foreign  exchange.  The  foreign  
exchange   market   is   not   based   in   a   single   location   but   is   composed   of   large   banks   which  

50  |  P a g e  
 
 
exist  around  the  world.  The  banks  serve  as  intermediaries  between  the  buyer  (investors  or  
business  firms)  and  the  seller  of  specific  foreign  currency.  There  are  two  major  components  
of  foreign  exchange  market  a  spot  market  and  a  forward  market.    

S POT   M ARKET    
Spot   market   is   a   major   component   of   the   foreign   exchange   market   and   facilitates   the  
immediate  exchange  of  currencies.  The  existing  exchange  rate  at  which  one  currency  can  be  
immediately   exchanged   for   another   currency   is   known   as   the   spot   exchange   rate   or   spot  
rate.  For  example,  in  past  years,  the  Canadian  dollar’s  value  has  ranged  between  0.60  and  
0.80   U.S   dollars.   Alternatively,   1   Canadian   dollar   =   0.60   U.S   dollars   or   1   U.S   dollar   =   1.66  
Canadian   dollar.   When   business   firms   purchase   foreign   supplies   or   acquire   a   firm   in   a  
foreign  country  and  when  investors  invest  in  foreign  securities,  they  normally  use  the  spot  
market  to  obtain  the  currency  needed  for  the  transaction.  

Exchange  rates  were  almost  fixed  during  the  Bretton  Woods  era  (1944  to  1971).  They  could  
only   change   by   1   percent   from   an   initially   established   rate.   To   maintain   stable   exchange  
rates,  central  banks  of  countries  intruded  by  exchanging  their  currency  on  reserve  for  other  
currencies   in   the   foreign   exchange   market.   The   boundaries   of   exchange   rates   were  
expanded   to   be   2.25   percent   from   the   specified   value   by   1971,   but   this   still   restricted  
exchange  rates  from  changing  significantly  over  period  of  time.  

During   the   year   1973,   the   boundaries   were   abolished.   This   was   the   result   of   pressure   on  
some   currencies   to   adjust   their   values   because   of   large   differences   between   the   demand  
and   the   supply   of   a   specific   currency.   For   example   if   the   flow   of   trade   and   investing  
between  the  United  States  and  a  given  country  changes,  the  U.S.  demand  and  the  supply  of  
that  foreign  currency  for  sale  (exchanged  for  dollars)  will  also  change.  

The   spot   rates   of   most   currencies   changes   because   of   the   continuous   change   in   demand  
and   supply   conditions   for   a   given   currency.   Therefore,   most   investors   and   business   firms  
that   will   need   or   receive   foreign   currencies   in   the   future   are   exposed   to   fluctuations   in  
exchange  rate.  

F ORWARD   M ARKET    
The   forward   market   is   responsible   to   facilitate   the   foreign   exchange   transactions   that  
involve   exchange   of   currencies   in   future.   The   specified   or   quoted   exchange   rate   at   which  
one  currency  can  be  exchanged  for  another  currency  on  a  specific  date  in  future  is  known  
as  the  forward  rate.  For  most  widely  traded  currency,  the  quote  for  forward  rate  is  typically  
close   to   the   spot   rate   quote   at   a   given   point   in   time.   Most   of   the   commercial   banks   that  
play   role   in   the   spot   market   also   participate   in   the   forward   market   by   accommodating  
requests   of   individual   investors   and   business   firms.   They   provide   quotes   to   individual  
investors   or   business   firms   who   wish   to   buy   or   sell   a   specific   foreign   currency   at   a   future  
point  in  time.  

51  |  P a g e  
 
 
Individual  investors  or  business  firms  who  make  use  of  the  forward  market  negotiate  with  a  
commercial   bank   for   a   forward   contract.   The   forward   contract   specifies   the   amount   of   a  
specific  currency  that  will  be  exchanged  in  future,  the  exchange  rate  (the  forward  rate)  at  
which  that  currency  will  be  exchanged  and  the  future  date  on  which  the  specific  exchange  
will   take   place.   Forward   contract   can   be   in   the   form   of   ‘buying   the   currency   forward’   or  
‘selling  the  currency  forward’.  A  business  firm  can  involve  in  a  forward  contract  by  ‘buying  
the  currency  forward’,  if  it  anticipates  the  requirement  of  foreign  currency  in  the  future.  On  
the  other  hand,  if  the  firm  anticipates  receiving  a  foreign  currency  in  future,  it  can  involve  in  
a  forward  contract  in  which  it  ‘sells  the  currency  forward’.  

Example  –  Spot  and  forward  Market    

Charlie   Co.,   a   business   firm   in   United   States,   expects   to   receive   200,000   Euros   at  
the  end   of   each   of   the  next  3  months   from   exporting  products   to  a  Germen  firm.  
The  spot  rate  of  the  euro  is  1.20  and  the  forward  rate  of  the  euro  is  also  1.20  for  
each   of   the   next   3   months.   Charlie   Co.   anticipates   that   the   value   of   euro   will  
decrease  to  1.12  in  3  months.  If  Charlie  Co.  decides  not  to  use  a  forward  contract  
then   it  will  be   converting   the   Euros  received   into  dollars   at  the   spot  rate  that   exists  
in   3   months.   A   comparison  of   the   cash   flows  that   is     expected   to  occur   in   3   months  
is  as  follows.  

TABLE  1:  A  comparison  of  expected  Cash    flows  

  Choices   Exchange  Rate   Expected  Cash  Inflows  


Use  the  spot   The  spot  rate  in  3  months  
1.   €200,000  ×  1.12  =  224,000  
market   is  expected  to  be  1.12.  
Use  the  forward   The  3-­‐month  forward  
2.   €200,000  ×  1.20  =  240,000  
market   rate  is  1.20  
 

The   comparison   shows   that   Charlie   Co.   expects   to   receive   16,000   higher   cash  
inflows   as  a  result  of  hedging  with  a   forward  contract.  Thus  Charlie  Co.  decides  to  
negotiate   a   forward   contract   to   sell   €200,000   forward.   Instead   of   an   exporter,   if  
Charlie   Co.  were   an   investor   and   anticipated   to   receive   Euros   in   the   future,   it   could  
have  been  feasible  to  use  a  forward  contract  in  the  same  m anner.  
 

 
TOPIC  SUMMARY  
All  types  of  business  firms  in  need  of  short  term  funds  issue  commercial  paper  as  a  means  
of   obtaining   funds.   These   firms   also   invest   in   the   other   forms   of   money   market   securities  
(e.g.  Treasury  bills)  when  they  have  temporarily  available  funds.  Investors  invest  in  all  the  
kinds  of  securities  discussed  above.  If  investors  wish  to  invest  their  funds  for  a  very  short  
time   period,   they   usually   focus   on   the   money   market   securities.   Whereas,   when   they   can  

52  |  P a g e  
 
 
invest   their   funds   for   long   periods   they   choose   capital   market   securities.   Although,   the  
money  market  securities  provide  a  relatively  low  expected  return,  but  are  highly  liquid  and  
generate  a  positive  return  until  the  investor  decides  to  use  funds  somewhere  else.  On  the  
other   hand,   the   capital   market   securities   offer   higher   returns,   but   their   expected   returns  
are   subject   to   a   higher   degree   of   risk.   Capital   markets   aid   in   the   exchange   of   long-­‐term  
securities,  therefore  they  help  to  finance  the  long-­‐term  growth  of  government  agencies  and  
business  firms.  In  the  capital  markets,  institutional  investors  play  a  major  role  in  supplying  
funds.  Commercial  banks,  insurance  companies,  pension  funds  and  bond  mutual  funds  are  
major   investors   for   bonds   in   the   primary   markets   and   secondary   markets.   Whereas,  
insurance  companies,  pension  funds  and  stock  mutual  funds  are  major  investors  for  stocks  
in  the  primary  and  secondary  markets.  

Self-­‐Reflection  Questions  

1.  Distinguish  between  the  roles  of  primary  and  secondary  markets.  

2.  Distinguish  between  money  and  capital  markets.  

3.  How  can  corporations  use  international  capital  markets  to  raise  funds?  

4.  Why  are  derivative  securities  purchased  by  investors?          

5.  Distinguish  between  the  spot  market  and  forward  market  for  foreign  exchange                                                                                      

6.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  term  risk  free  rate?  

7.  Explain  why  the  firm  that  issues  a  corporate  bond  must  promise  investors  a  higher  
return  than  that  available  on  a  treasury  security  that  has  the  same  maturity.                                        

8.  How  does  stock  differ  from  bonds  in  terms  of  ownership  privileges?                                                                                              

9.  How  does  the  stock  exchange  facilitate  the  exchange  of  stocks?                                                                  

10.  How  does  OTC  market  differ  from  the  organized  securities  exchange?                                                                                    

   

53  |  P a g e  
 
 

UNIT  2  –  REFERENCES  
Frederic  S  Mishkin  and  Stanley  Eakins  (2012),  Financial  Markets  and  Institutions,  Global  7th  
edition,  Person  Education  as  Prentice  Hall  Limited    

Gitman,   Lawrence   J.   Web   Chapter   Financial   Markets   and   Institutions   available   at  


http://wps.aw.com/wps/media/objects/5448/5579249/FinancialMarketsandInstitutions.pd
f    

Madura,  Jeff    (2012),  Financial  Markets  and  Institutions,  10th  edition,  South-­‐West,  Cengage  
Learning  Limited    

UNIT  2  –  SUMMARY  
ASSIGNMENTS  AND  ACTIVITIES  
The   assignment   and   activities   covered   in   the   unit   will   enable   the   students   to   clearly  
visualize  the  role  of  financial  institutions  and  markets  and  in  what  respect  they  are  different  
from  one  country  to  another.        

SUMMARY  
The   unit   describes   in   detail   how   financial   institutions   serve   managers   of   firms   as  
intermediaries   between   investors   and   business   firms.   It   highlights   the   various   types   of  
financial   institutions   and   how   they   work.   Provides   an   overview   of   financial   markets   and  
explains   how   investors   and   businesses   trade   money   market   and   capital   market   securities   in  
the   financial   markets   in   order   to   satisfy   their   needs.   It   sheds   light   on   the   major   securities  
exchanges,   derivative   securities   and   foreign   exchange   market   and   explains   why   investors  
and   business   firms   use   them.   The   roles   of   financial   managers,   financial   markets   and  
investors  in  channelling  financial  flows  of  funds  are  summarized  in  the  table.  

Table  2:  Channelling  financial  Flow  of  Funds  

Role  of  Financial  Managers   Role  of  Financial  Markets   Role  of  Investors  
Financial   managers   make   The   financial   markets   provide   Investors   provide   the  
financing   decisions   that   a   forum   in   which   firms   can   funds   that   are   to   be  
require   funding   from   issue   securities   to   obtain   the   used   by   financial  
investors   in   the   financial   funds   that   they   need   and   in   managers   to   finance  
markets.   which   investors   can   purchase   corporate  growth.  
securities  to  invest  their  funds.  

 
NEXT  STEPS  
Having  understood  the  types  and  roles  of  financial  institutions  and  markets  the  next  unit  
will  explore  the  financial  statements.  Also,  ratio  analysis  are  highlighted  in  the  next  unit.    

54  |  P a g e  
 
 

UNIT  THREE  -­‐  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS    


UNIT  3  INTRODUCTION  

Business  transactions  are  recorded,  summarized  and  reported  by  the  use  of  different  kinds  
of  financial  statements,  each  serving  a  different  purpose.  Financial  statements  are  prepared  
in   order   to   reflect   on   the   activities   of   an   organisation,   to   measure   performance,   to  
benchmark  and  compare  against  other  organisations.  Financial  statements  are  the  primary  
communication  tool  to  stakeholders  of  an  organisation.  This  course  primarily  focus  on  three  
financial   statements,   namely;   the   statement   of   comprehensive   income,   the   balance   sheet  
and  cash  flow  statements.  It  is  through  these  reports  that  the  progress  of  an  organization  
can  be  measured  and  corrective  action  be  taken,  if  there  are  deviations  from  the  goals  of  
the  business.  Therefore,  whilst  the  financial  planning  course  has  introduced  the  student  to  
preparation   of   financial   statements,   in   this   course   the   student   is   introduced   to   the   use   of  
financial   statements   as   a   financial   reporting   system   that   could   help   management   and  
shareholders  to  assess  the  financial  position  of  the  business.  As  a  result,  this  unit  introduces  
the   students   to   the   three   types   of   financial   statements.   Also,   the   students   are   equipped  
with   the   skills   to   analyse   each   type   of   the   financial   statements.   Specific   objectives   of   the  
unit  are  outlined  below.  

UNIT  3  OBJECTIVES  

Upon  completion  of  this  unit  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Tell  the  difference  between  the  various  financial  statements  

2. Analyse  and  interpret  the  different  financial  statements  

UNIT  3  READINGS  

To  complete  this  unit  you  are  required  to  read  the  following  book  chapters:  

Stolowy,   H.   And   Lebas,   Michel   J.   (2002)   Corporate   Financial   Reporting   –   A   Global  


Perspective.  Thomson  Learning.  London.    –  Chapters  2  and  3  

55  |  P a g e  
 
 
Subramanyam,   K.R.   and   Wild   John.   J   (2009)   Financial   Statement   analysis,   10TH   Edition,  
McGraw-­‐Hill   Irwin,   New   York.   –   Chapter   1   in   http://highered.mcgraw-­‐
hill.com/sites/dl/free/0073379433/597452/Subramanyam_fsa_sample_Ch01.pdf   accessed  
23/04/2013  

IFRS   (2012)   Illustrative   Financial   Statements.   KPMG.   In  


http://www.kpmg.com/Global/en/IssuesAndInsights/ArticlesPublications/IFRS-­‐illustrative-­‐
financial-­‐statements/Documents/IFRS-­‐illustrative-­‐financial-­‐statements-­‐2012.pdf   accessed  
29/04/2013  

UNIT  3  ASSIGNMENTS  AND  ACTIVITIES  

To  reinforce  the  students’  learning  during  the  course  seminars,  the  participating  institutions  
could   avail   published   financial   statements   of   a   local   organisation.     The   students   could   be  
assigned   to   work   in   groups   to   analyse   and   interpret   the   different   financial   statements.  
Another   activity   could   be   a   multiple   choice   test   designed   to   examine   the   student’s  
understanding  of  the  component  parts  of  the  different  types  of  financial  statements.    The  
end  of  topic  questions  are  provided  to  assess  student  learning  for  the  respective  topics.      

56  |  P a g e  
 
 

TOPIC  3.1  STATEMENTS  OF  COMPREHENSIVE  INCOME  AND  FINANCIAL  POSITION  

TOPIC  3.1  INTRODUCTION  

The  performance  of  a  company  should  be  measured  overtime  to  judge  as  to  whether  the  
company   is   achieving   its   goals   and   delivering   value   to   its   shareholders.   Also,   the  
performance  of  the  company  could  be  measured  by  making  a  comparison  with  other  similar  
companies,  which  could  be  complicated  due  to  different  sizes  of  companies  and  disparity  of  
their  operations.  To  do  so,  the  company’s  financial  statements  i.e.  the  balance  sheet,    the  
income   and   cash   flow   statement,   which   result   from   the   financial   accounting   process,     are  
analysed   using   financial   ratios.   The   analysis   of   financial   statements   using   ratios   is   termed  
financial  analysis.  This  topic  explores  the  components  of  the  financial  statements.  

TOPIC  3.1  OBJECTIVES  

Upon  completion  of  this  topic  the  students  will  be  able  to:  

1. Describe  the  component  elements  found  in  the  statements  comprehensive  income  and  
financial    position    

COMPONENTS  OF  THE  STATEMENT  COMPREHENSIVE  INCOME  

The   statement   of   comprehensive   income   is   based   on   the   business   transactions   that   have  
been   recorded   for   a   specific   period,   usually   12   months.   It   includes   profit   or   loss   for   that  
period   plus   other   comprehensive   income   recognised   in   that   period.   However,   an   entity   has  
a  choice  of  presenting  two  statements  or  a  single  statement  of  comprehensive  income.  

TWO  STATEMENTS  
Where   the   company   presents   two   statements,   the   first   statement   is   the   income  
statement  (profit  and  loss),  the  bottom  line  of  which  is  profit  or  loss.    This  approach  
is  consistent  with  some  International  Financial  Reporting  Standards  (IFRSs)  (see  IAS  
1.89)   that   permit   for   some   components   to   be   excluded   from   profit   or   loss   and  
instead   to   be   included   in   other   comprehensive   income.     The   second   is   the  
statement  of  comprehensive  income,  which  begins  with  the  profit  or  loss  from  the  
income  statement  bottom  line.    

57  |  P a g e  
 
 
Figure  4:  Presentation  of  two  statements  

 
PROFIT  AND  LOSS  STATEMENT   The   bottom   line  
  of   the   income  
Operating  income  –  operating  expenses  =  PROFIT  OR  LOSS   statement  
  starts   the   other  
STATEMENT  OF  OTHER  COMPTREHENSIVE  INCOME   comprehensive  
income      
  Profit  and  loss  +  other  non  operating  income  

The  components  of  each  of  the  two  statements  are  outlined  below.  

C OMPONENTS  OF  THE   P ROFIT  AND   L OSS  


The  income  statement  (profit  or  loss)  is  based  on  the  business  transactions  that  have  been  
recorded   for   a   specific   period,   usually   12   months.   The   International   Accounting  

Standards   (IAS)   regulation   number   1.88   stipulates   that   all   items   of   income   and  
expense  recognized  in  a  period  must  be  included  in  profit  or  loss  unless  a  standard  
or  an  interpretation  requires  otherwise.  As  a  result  of  the  2003  revision  to  IAS  1,  the  
Standard   is   now   using   'profit   or   loss'   rather   than   'net   profit   or   loss'   as   the  
descriptive  term  for  the  bottom  line  of  the  income  statement.  

The   profit   and   loss   statement   allows   for   the   business   to   analyse   how   the   income  
(profit   or   loss)   for   the   period   was   created.   The   statement   records   the   resources  
consumed  and  the  revenue  generated  from  serving  the  customers  during  a  specific  
period.  The  profit  and  loss  statement  does  not  reflect  the  financial  position  of  the  
firm,  but  tells  us  how  profitable  the  transactions  for  serving  the  customers  were.    

58  |  P a g e  
 
 
TABLE  3:  EXAMPLE  OF  THE  COMPONENTS  OF  PROFIT  AND  LOSS  STATEMENT    

ABC  Corporation  

 
For  the  Year  Ended  December  31,  2007  
Sales  Revenue        2,900,000   Revenue  Section  
Cost  of  Goods  Sold                        1,750,000  
Gross  Profit  (Margin)          1,150,000  
Operating  Expenses:      

 
General  &  Administrative  Expenses                140,000       Operating  Expenses:  
Selling  Expenses                    80,000       Note:  Expenses  are  on  the  left  
Amortization  of  Intangible  Assets                    25,000       with  the  total  on  the  right.  
Write  off  of  Goodwill                    17,500          
Restructuring  Costs                420,000            
Loss  from  Inventory  Write-­‐Down                130,000            
Total  Operating  Expenses        812,500        
Operating  Income        337,500        
   

   
Other  Income  (Expense):       Other  Income  (expense)  
includes  items  that  relate  to  
operations  but  are  not  part  of  
operations.  Note:  If  there  is  a  
single  item  it  is  places  on  the  
right.  Multiple  items  are  
placed  on  the  left  with  the  
total  on  the  right.  
Interest  Income                    75,000        
Interest  Expense              (42,500)      
Gain  on  Sale  of  Operating  Assets                    78,200        
Loss  on  Sales  of  Operating  Assets                    (8,250)      
           102,500    
Income  From  Continuing  Operations  Before                            23,500,000        
Income  Tax  Expense  
Income  Tax  Expense  @  40%                    9,400,000     Income  Tax  from  continuing  
Income  before  Extraordinary  Items        14,100,000     operations  is  shown  as  a  
separate  line  item.  
   

   
Discontinued  Operations:      
Operating  Income  (loss)from  Discontinued                                 Discontinued  Operations  
Operation  Net  of  40%  tax   4,000,000     usually  have  two  components.  
The  first  is  the  gain  (loss)  from  
part  year  operations.  
Loss  (Gain)on  Sale  of  Discontinued                         The  second  is  the  gain  (loss)  
Operations  Assets  Net  of  40%  tax   (15,000,000 from  the  sale  of  the  assets.  
)  
Loss  (Gain)  on  Discontinued  Operations        (11,000,000)   Both  are  always  net  of  Income  
Tax.  
Income  Before  Extraordinary  Items        3,100,000        
   
   

Extraordinary  Items:      
Gain  from  Early  Sale  of  Bonds  Net  of  40%                         Extraordinary  Items  are  items  
Tax   12,000,000     that  are  not  expected  to  
Loss  From  Flood  Damage  Net  of  40%  Tax                             happen  frequently  but  have  a  
(3,000,000)   major  (Material)  impact  on  the  
current  year’s  operations.  Items  
are  report  net  of  income  tax  
Gain  (Loss)  from  Extraordinary  Operations                                9,000,000      
Profit  or  (loss)        12,100,000    

Source:  extracted  from  


(http://studentweb.usq.edu.au/home/W0054016/Pages/Financial_Acct_Folder/Ex
ample_Comprehensive_Income_Statement.htm)  

59  |  P a g e  
 
 
C OMPONENTS  OF  THE  STATEMENT  OF  COMPREHENSIVE  INCOME  IN  A  TWO  STEP  APPROACH  
In   a   two   statement   approach,   the   comprehensive   statement   starts   with   the   bottom  
line   of   the   profit   and   loss   statement.   The   components   of   the   comprehensive   income  
should  include:    

• changes  in  revaluation  surplus    

• actuarial  gains  and  losses  on  defined  benefit  plans  recognised  in  accordance  with    

• gains  and  losses  arising  from  translating  the  financial  statements  of  a  foreign  operation    

• gains  and  losses  on  re-­‐measuring  available-­‐for-­‐sale  financial  assets    

• The  effective  portion  of  gains  and  losses  on  hedging  instruments  in  a  cash  flow  hedge.    

(IFRSs,  2013)  

Table  4:  Example  of  statement  of  comprehensive  income    

Profit  or  (loss)        12,100,000    


 
Other  Comprehensive  Income  (Loss):      
Comprehensive  Income  is  from  
Foreign  currency  translation   non-­‐owner  transactions.  The  gains  
adjustment  loss,  net  of  40%  tax                        (3,900,000)       and  losses  are  outside  the  control  
of  the  owner.  Items  are  reported  
Unrealized  gains  on  investment   net  of  income  tax.  
securities,  net  of  40%  tax                            4,200,000        

Total  Other  Comprehensive  Income  (Loss)                                      300,000    

Comprehensive  Income        12,400,000    

Source:  extracted  from  


(http://studentweb.usq.edu.au/home/W0054016/Pages/Financial_Acct_Folder/Ex
ample_Comprehensive_Income_Statement.htm  )  

   

60  |  P a g e  
 
 
S INGLE   S TATEMENT  OF   C OMPREHENSIVE   I NCOME  

The   single   statement   of   comprehensive   income   combines   the   components   of   the   income  
statement   and   the   statement   of   other   comprehensive   income,   as   highlighted   in   FIGURE  5  
and  example  below.      

Figure  5:  Presentation  of  a  single  statement  of  comprehensive  income  

  STATEMENT  OF  COMPREHENSIVE  INCOME  

  Profit  and  loss    


Other  comprehensive  income  
 
TOTAL  COMPREHENSIVE  INCOME  
 

The  International  Accounting  Standards  (See  IAS  1)  stipulate  for  the  minimum  items  in  the  
statement  of  comprehensive  income  to  include  the  following:    

a) revenue    

b) finance  costs    

c) share  of  the  profit  or  loss  of  associates  and  joint  ventures  accounted  for  using  the  
equity  method    

d) tax  expense    

e) a  single  amount  comprising  the  total  of  (i)  the  post-­‐tax  profit  or  loss  of  discontinued  
operations  and  (ii)  the  post-­‐tax  gain  or  loss  recognised  on  the  disposal  of  the  assets  
or  disposal  group(s)  constituting  the  discontinued  operation    

f) profit  or  loss    

g) each  component  of  other  comprehensive  income  classified  by  nature    

h) share   of   the   other   comprehensive   income   of   associates   and   joint   ventures  


accounted  for  using  the  equity  method    

i) total  comprehensive  income    

61  |  P a g e  
 
 
j) The   following   items   must   also   be   disclosed   in   the   statement   of   comprehensive  
income  as  allocations  for  the  period  

k) profit  or  loss  for  the  period  attributable  to  non-­‐controlling  interests  and  owners  of  
the  parent    

l) total  comprehensive  income  attributable  to  non-­‐controlling  interests  and  owners  of  
the  parent    

m) Additional   line   items   may   be   needed   to   fairly   present   the   entity's   results   of  
operations.    
n) No  items  may  be  presented  in  the  statement  of  comprehensive  income  (or  in  the  
income  statement,  if  separately  presented)  or  in  the  notes  as  'extraordinary  items'.    
o) The   AIS   also   requires   for   disclosure   of   the   following,   if   material,   either   in   the  
statement  of  comprehensive  income  or  in  the  notes.  

p) write-­‐downs   of   inventories   to   net   realisable   value   or   of   property,   plant   and  


equipment  to  recoverable  amount,  as  well  as  reversals  of  such  write-­‐downs    

q) restructurings   of   the   activities   of   an   entity   and   reversals   of   any   provisions   for   the  
costs  of  restructuring    

r) disposals  of  items  of  property,  plant  and  equipment    

s) disposals  of  investments    

t) discontinuing  operations    

u) litigation  settlements    

v) other  reversals  of  provisions    

The  IAS  further  stipulates  that  the  expenses  in  the  profit  or  loss  statement  be  categorised  
for  analysis  either  by  nature  (raw  materials,  staffing  costs,  depreciation,  etc.)  or  by  function  
(cost   of   sales,   selling,   administrative,   etc).   Where   the   expenses   are   categorised   by   function,  
the   IAS,   additional   information   on   the   nature   of   expenses   must   be   disclosed,   for   example   –  
at   a   minimum   depreciation,   amortisation   and   employee   benefits   expense.   Below   is   an  
example  of  the  Statement  of  Comprehensive  Income.  )  

62  |  P a g e  
 
 
Table  5:  Example  of  a  single  statement  of  comprehensive  income    

Statement  of  Income  and  Comprehensive  Income  


For  the  Year  Ended  December  31,  2007  
Sales  Revenue                  2,900,000  
Cost  of  Goods  Sold                        1,750,000  
Gross  Profit                1,150,000  
Operating  Expenses:      
General  &  Administrative  Expenses                        140,000      
Selling  Expenses                            80,000      
Amortization  of  Intangible  Assets                            25,000      
Write  off  of  Goodwill                            17,500      
Restructuring  Costs                        420,000        
Loss  from  Inventory  Write-­‐Down                        130,000        
Total  Operating  Expenses                      812,500    
Operating  Income        337,500    
   
Other  Income  (Expense):      
Interest  Income                            75,000      
Interest  Expense                        (42,500)      
Gain  on  Sale  of  Operating  Assets                            78,200        
Loss  on  Sales  of  Operating  Assets                              (8,250)      
Total  Other  Operating  Income(Expense)            102,500  
Income  From  Continuing  Operations  Before  Income  Tax                        
Expense       23,500,000    
Income  Tax  Expense  @  40%                              9,400,000    
Income  before  Extraordinary  Items        14,100,000    
   
Discontinued  Operations:      
Operating  Income  (loss)from  Discontinued                            
Operation  Net  of  40%  tax   4,000,000        
Loss  (Gain)on  Sale  of  Discontinued  Operations                    
Assets  Net  of  40%  tax   (15,000,000)      
                 
Loss  (Gain)  on  Discontinued  Operations       (11,000,000)  
Income  Before  Extraordinary  Items        3,100,000    
   
Extraordinary  Items:      
Gain  from  Early  Sale  of  Bonds  Net  of  40%  Tax                      12,000,000        
Loss  From  Flood  Damage  Net  of  40%  Tax                      (3,000,000)      
Gain  (Loss)  from  Extraordinary  Operations                              9,000,000    
Net  Income        12,100,000    
   
Other  Comprehensive  Income  (Loss):      
Foreign  currency  translation  adjustment  loss,  net  of                        
40%  tax   (3,900,000)      
Unrealized  gains  on  investment  securities,  net  of                            
40%  tax   4,200,000        
Total  Other  Comprehensive  Income  (Loss)                                      

Financial  Management     Page|  63    


 
 
300,000    
Comprehensive  Income        12,400,000    
   
Earnings  Per  Share  (1,000,000  shares  issued  and  Outstanding)      
Income  (loss)  From  Continuing  Operations                                      14.10    
Loss  (Gain)  on  Discontinued  Operations                                (11.00)  
Gain  (Loss)  from  Extraordinary  Operations                                          9.00    
Other  Comprehensive  Income  (Loss)                                          0.30    
Comprehensive  Income  Per  Share                                            12.40    
Source:    
(http://studentweb.usq.edu.au/home/W0054016/Pages/Financial_Acct_Folder/Ex
ample_Comprehensive_Income_Statement.htm  )  

COMPONENTS  OF  THE  STATEMENT  OF  FINANCIAL  POSITION  (BALANCE  SHEET)  

The   balance   sheet   statement   provides   an   up   to   date   statement   of   the   financial  


position   or   net   worth   of   the   company   for   a   given   period.     As   stipulated   by   the  
International  Financial  Reporting  Board,  the  statement  of  financial  position  (balance  
sheet)   presents   and   classifies   the   resources   (assets),   the   obligations   to   external  
parties   (liabilities   to   creditors)   and   equity   to   share   holders   for   a   certain   period.    
These   comprise   the   accounting   equation   also   known   as   the   balance   sheet  
equation,  which  is  expressed  as:  assets  =  Liabilities  +  equity  

The   balance   sheet   can   either   be   presented   using   a   vertical   format   or   a   horizontal  
format.   The   vertical   format   is   mostly   used   for   published   accounts.    According   to   the  
International   Accounting   Standard   1,   Current   assets   are   cash;   cash   equivalent;  
assets   held   for   collection,   sale,   or   consumption   within   the   entity's   normal   operating  
cycle;  or  assets  held  for  trading  within  the  next  12  months.  All  other  assets  are  non-­‐
current.      

The   current   liabilities   are   obligations   that   are   to   be   settled   within   the   entity's  
normal   operating   cycle   or   due   within   12   months,   or   those   held   for   trading,   or   those  
for   which   the   entity   does   not   have   an   unconditional   right   to   defer   payment   beyond  
12  months.  Other  liabilities  are  non-­‐current.    

Financial  Management     Page|  64    


 
 
The   International   Accounting   Standard   1   also   requires   that   the   minimum   balance  
sheet  items  should  include:    

(a)  Property,  plant  and  equipment    

(b)  Investment  property    

(c)  Intangible  assets    

(d)  Financial  assets  (excluding  amounts  shown  under  (e),  (h),  and  (i))    

(e)  Investments  accounted  for  using  the  equity  method    

(f)  Biological  assets    

(g)  Inventories    

(h)  Trade  and  other  receivables    

(i)  Cash  and  cash  equivalents    

(j)  Assets  held  for  sale    

(k)  Trade  and  other  payables    

(l)  Provisions    

(m)  Financial  liabilities  (excluding  amounts  shown  under  (k)  and  (l))    

(n)  Liabilities  and  assets  for  current  tax,  as  defined  in  IAS  12    

(o)  Deferred  tax  liabilities  and  deferred  tax  assets,  as  defined  in  IAS  12    

(p)  Liabilities  included  in  disposal  groups    

(q)  Non-­‐controlling  interests,  presented  within  equity  and    

(r)  Issued  capital  and  reserves  attributable  to  owners  of  the  parent    

Financial  Management     Page|  65    


 
 
However,  additional  line  items  may  be  needed  to  fairly  present  the  entity's  financial  
position.    

         The  International  Accounting  Standards  further  requires  the  following  disclosures  


in  relation  to  issued  share  capital  and  reserves:  

a) numbers  of  shares  authorised,  issued  and  fully  paid,  and  issued  but  not  fully  paid    

b) par  value    

c) reconciliation  of  shares  outstanding  at  the  beginning  and  the  end  of  the  period    

d) description  of  rights,  preferences,  and  restrictions    

e) treasury  shares,  including  shares  held  by  subsidiaries  and  associates    

f) shares  reserved  for  issuance  under  options  and  contracts    

g) a  description  of  the  nature  and  purpose  of  each  reserve  within  equity    

Table  6:  Example  of  a  Statement  of  Financial  Position    

       31  December  20X7                31  


           D    ecember  
      20X6  
ASSETS    Currency  unit(000      
Current  asset      
Cash  and  cash  equivalents                                                                                    312,400                                                                                          322,900  
       
Trade  receivables       91,600                                                              110,800                                                                    
Other  financial  assets—derivative   2,000                                                                        1,100        
hedging  instruments  
Inventories           135,230                                                              132,500          
Other  current  assets                                                                                                              23,650                                                                                            11,350  
         
Total  current  assets                                                                                                                      564,880  
                                                                           578,650  
       
Non-­‐current  asset      
Financial  assets—investments  in   100,150                                                              110,770            
shares                                                              
Investments  in  associates                                                                                      100,500                                                                                      121,000          
• carried  at  fair  value                                                        60,000                                                                                        71,000  
           
• carried  at  cost  less  impairment              40,500                                                                                          50,000  
           
Investments  in  jointly  controlled   42,000                                                                  35,000  
       
entities                                                                    
• carried  at  fair  value                                                        20,000  
                                                                                     13,000  
         
• carried  at  cost  less  impairment              22,000                                                                                          22,000  
           

Financial  Management     Page|  66    


 
 
Investment  property—carried  at   150,000                                                              120,000      
fair  value                                                          
Property,  plant  and  equipment—    
carried  at  cost  less  accumulated  
Depreciation   200,700                                                              240,020        
Biological  assets                                                                                                                            70,000                                                                                            75,000  
     
• carried  at  fair  value                                                        30,000                                                                                        25,000  
       
• carried  at  cost  less  impairment              40,000                                                                                          50,000  
       
Goodwill               80,800                                                                  91,200        
Other  intangible  assets                                                                                                107,070                                                                                        127,560  
   
Deferred  tax  assets                                                                                                                  50,400                                                                                          25,000  
     
Total  non-­‐current  assets   901,620                                                              945,550        
Total  assets   1,    466,500                                                        1,524,200    
LIABILITIES  AND  EQUITY      
Current  liabilities      
Bank  overdrafts                                                                                                                              10,000                                                                        7,000                        
Trade  and  other  payables                                                                                            90,100                                                                              160,620  
           
Short-­‐term  borrowings                                                                                                150,000                                                                              200,000            
Current  portion  of  bank  loans                                                                            20,000                                                                                20,000  
               
Current  portion  of  obligations   1,500                                                        1,200                        
under  finance  leases        
Current  portion  of  employee   15,000                                                        10,000                  
benefit  obligations  
Current  tax  payable                                                                                                                23,500                                                                              40,800  
             
Short-­‐term  provisions                                                                                                              5,000                                                                            4,800  
                     
Total  current  liabilities   315,100   454,420  
Non-­‐current  liabilities      
Bank  loans                                                                                                                                                65,000  
                                                                       85,000                
Obligations  under  finance  leases                                                                      2,300                                                                              3,800  
                   
Environmental  restoration   26,550                                                        48,440                  
provision                                                                                  
Long-­‐term  employee  benefit   78,000                                                        75,000                  
obligations        
Deferred  tax  liabilities                                                                                                            5,800                                                                              26,040  
               
Total  non-­‐current  liabilities                                                                              177,650                           238,280  
Total  liabilities                                                                                                                            492,750                   692,700  
Equity      
Share  capital                                                                                                                                    650,000                                                                        600,000  
Retained  earnings                                                                                                                  243,500                                                                               161,700  
Actuarial  gains  on  defined   8,200                                                        20,100        
benefit  pension  plan  
Gains  on  hedges  of  foreign   2,000                                                        1,100      
exchange  risks  of  firm  
commitments  
Total  equity  attributable  to  owners   903,700                                                   782,900  
of  the  parent                                                  

Financial  Management     Page|  67    


 
 
Non-­‐controlling  interests   70,050                                                       48,600                                                                              
Total  equity                                                                                                                                        973,750  
                                                                            831,500  
Total  equity  and  liabilities                                                                                        1,466,500                               1,524,200  
 

TOPIC  SUMMARY  

The   comprehensive   income   statement   and   the   statement   of   financial   position   are   the   basis  
upon  which  the  health  of  the  organisation  can  be  assessed.    It  was  therefore  important  that  
the  learners’  be  introduced  to  the  make-­‐up  of  these  statements,  before  they  could  employ  
them   in   the   financial   analysis.   As   a   result,   this   topic   has   introduced   the   learners   to   the  
components   of   these   statements   as   required   by   the   International   Accounting   Standards  
(IAS)  1.    

Self-­‐Reflection  Questions                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    
1.  What  is  the  difference  between  the  single  step  and  two  steps  statement  of  
comprehensive  income?                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    
2.  List  the  items  of  the  statement  of  financial  position.  

   

Financial  Management     Page|  68    


 
 

TOPIC  3.2  ANALYSIS  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS    

TOPIC  3.2  INTRODUCTION  

Financial  analysis  is  based  on  the  financial  statements,  which  have  been  introduced  above.  
Financial  analysis  is  normally  performed  by  organisations  and  business  analyst  to  highlight    
the  company’s  financial  position.  The  information  derived  from  the  analysis  could  help  the  
business   managers   and   investors   to   gauge   the   financial   position   of   the   company   by  
addressing  questions  pertaining  to  availability  of  resources  for  growth  and  for  investment.    
Other  questions  that  could  be  addressed  by  financial  analysis  to  the  managers  and  investors  
pertain   to   the   level   of   profitability   of   the   firm   and   generally   as   to   whether   the   company  
performs  as  was  expected.    

TOPIC  3.2  OBJECTIVES  

At  the  end  of  the  topic  the  students  will  be  able  to:  

1. Analyse   and   interpret   the   statement   of   comprehensive   income   and   the   statement   of  
financial  position    
2. Advice  management  on  how  to  improve  the  financial  position  of  the  firm,  based  on  the  
financial  analysis.    

INTRODUCTION  TO  RATIO  ANALYSIS  

Businesses  constantly  gauge  the  performance  of  the  business  in  terms  of  its  management,  
plans,   financial   situation   and   strategies   to   inform   decision   making.   Business   analysis   is  
therefore   deemed   an   important   exercise   of   the   firm   as   it   informs   stakeholders   about   the  
state  of  the  firm.  Whilst  there  are  several  types  of  business  analysis  (see  FIGURE  6  below),  
this  course  mainly  focuses  on  financial  analysis.          

Ratio   analysis   provides   ways   of   comparing   and   investigating   the   relationships   between  
different   pieces   of   financial   information.   There   is   a   wide   range   of   financial   ratios   ranging  
from  simple  to  complicated  computations.  However,  the  biggest  problem   with  ratios  is  that  
people  calculate  them  differently.  Also,  the  definitions  of  their  sources  differ.  It  is  therefore  
important   that   when   using   the   ratios   as   tools   of   analysis,   you   should   be   careful   to  

Financial  Management     Page|  69    


 
 
document   how   you   calculate   each   ratio.   When   comparing   your   numbers   to   those   of  
another  sources,  be  sure  you  know  how  their  numbers  are  computed,    (Firer  et  al,  2004).    

The   following   questions   need   to   be   taken   into   consideration   when   analysing   statements  
using  ratios:  

1.  How  is  the  ratio  computed?  

2.  What  is  the  ratio  intended  to  measure,  and  why  might  we  be  interested?  

3.  What  is  the  unit  of  measurement?  

4.  What  might  a  high  or  low  value  be  telling  us?  How  might  such  values  be  misleading?  

5.  How  could  this  measure  be  improved?  

Figure  6:  Process  of  business  analysis  

Source:    Subramanyam  and  Wild  (2009)    

Financial  ratios  are  traditionally  grouped  into  the  following  categories:  

• Short-­‐term  solvency,  or  liquidity,  ratios.  


• Profitability  ratios    
• Investment  ratios  
• Asset  management,  or  turnover  or  efficiency  ratios  

Financial  Management     Page|  70    


 
 
 Figure  7  below,  depicts  the  four  types  of  ratios.  The  four  types  of  ratios  are  examined  below;  

Figure  7:  Types  of  Financial  Ratios  

Source:  Dyson  (2010)  

LIQUIDITY  MEASURES  
As   the   name   suggests,   short-­‐term   solvency   ratios   as   a   group   are   intended   to   provide  
information   about   a   firm’s   liquidity,   and   these   ratios   are   sometimes   called   liquidity  
measures  .The  primary  concern  is  the  firm’s  ability  to  pay  its  bills  over  the  short  run  without  
undue  stress.  Consequently,  these  ratios  focus  on  current  assets  and  current  liabilities.  For  
obvious  reasons,  liquidity  ratios  are  particularly  interesting  to  short-­‐term  creditors.  

Since  financial  managers  are  constantly  working  with  banks  and  other  short-­‐term  lenders,  
an   understanding   of   these   ratios   is   essential.   One   advantage   of   looking   at   current   assets  
and   liabilities   is   that   their   book   values   and   market   values   are   likely   to   be   similar.   Often  
(though  not  always),  these  assets  and  liabilities  just  don’t  live  long  enough  for  the  two  to  
get  seriously  out  of  step.  On  the  other  hand,  like  any  type  of  near-­‐cash,  current  assets  and  
liabilities  can  and  do  change  fairly  rapidly,  so  today’s  amounts  may  not  be  a  reliable  guide  
to  the  future.    

The   figures   from   the   statement   of   financial   position   will   be   employed   to     illustrate  
computation  of  the  liquidity  measures.  

C URRENT  RATIO      

Financial  Management     Page|  71    


 
 
One  of  the  most  widely  used  ratios  is  the  current  ratio.  The  ratio  is  represented  as  follows,  
gives  a  relationship  between  current  assets  and  currents  liabilities,  its  measures  as  to  how  
much  an  organisation  can  be  able  to  meet  its  short  term  liabilities  as  they  fall  due  by  the  
conversion  of  its  current  assets.  

𝐂𝐮𝐫𝐫𝐞𝐧𝐭  𝐚𝐬𝐬𝐞𝐭𝐬
Current  ratio  =                    
𝐂𝐮𝐫𝐞𝐧𝐭  𝐥𝐢𝐚𝐛𝐢𝐥𝐢𝐭𝐢𝐞𝐬

                                                               
Example  –  Current  ratio  
 
𝟓𝟔𝟒,𝟖𝟖𝟎 𝟓𝟕𝟖,𝟔𝟓𝟎
In  2007                 = 𝟏. 𝟔  𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒔                                                in  2008               = 𝟏. 𝟑  𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒔          
𝟑𝟓𝟏,𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟓𝟒,𝟒𝟐𝟎
   

 Because   current   assets   and   liabilities   are,   in   principle,   converted   to   cash   over   the   following  
12  months,  the  current  ratio  is  a  measure  of  short-­‐term  liquidity.  The  above  results  show  
that  the  current  ratio  was  1.6  times  in  2007  and  1.3  in  2008,  this  simply  shows  how  many  
times  the  current  liabilities  are  covered  by  the  current  assets.  

 The   higher   current   ratio   is   quite   favourable   to   the   organisation   and   other   external  
stakeholders,  e.g.  creditors.  A  high  current  ratio  means  an  organisation  will  be  able  to  settle  
its  short  term  liabilities  as  they  fall  due,  but  it  also  may  indicate  an  inefficient  use  of  cash  
and   other   short-­‐term   assets.   On   normal   circumstances,   a   current   ratio   of   above   1   is  
favourable,   however   this   is   relative   to   the   industry,   a   current   ratio   of   less   than   1   would  
mean  that  net  working  capital  (current  assets  less  current  liabilities)  is  negative.    

Q UICK  OR  ACID  TEST  RATIO    


Inventory  is  often  the  least  liquid  current  asset.  It’s  also  the  one  for  which  the  book  values  
are   least   reliable   as   measures   of   market   value   since   the   quality   of   the   inventory   isn’t  
considered.(www.mhhe.com.rwj)   this   is   because     Some   of   the   inventory   damaged,  
obsolete,  or  lost.  We  know  keeping  large  amounts  of  inventory  is  an  unhealthy  situation,  it  
compromise  liquidity  and  show  sign  of  problems  in  turning  over  the  stock.  In  this  case  on  
calculation  of  the  quick  or  acid  test  ratio,  inventory  is  eliminated  from  the  current  assets,  
only  highly  liquid  assets  are  taken  

Financial  Management     Page|  72    


 
 
(𝐂𝐮𝐫𝐫𝐞𝐧𝐭  𝐚𝐬𝐬𝐞𝐭𝐬  !    𝐢𝐧𝐯𝐞𝐧𝐭𝐨𝐫𝐲)
Quick  ratio  (acid  test  ratio)  =      
𝐂𝐮𝐫𝐞𝐧𝐭  𝐥𝐢𝐚𝐛𝐢𝐥𝐢𝐭𝐢𝐞𝐬

Example  –  Quick  ratio  


 
𝟓𝟔𝟒,𝟖𝟖𝟎!𝟏𝟑𝟓,𝟐𝟑𝟎 𝟓𝟕𝟖,𝟔𝟓𝟎  –𝟏𝟑𝟐,𝟓𝟎𝟎
In  2007                 = 𝟏. 𝟐  𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒔                  in  2008               = 𝟎. 𝟗    𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒔          
  𝟑𝟓𝟏,𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟓𝟒,𝟒𝟐𝟎
 
 

The  acid  test  ratio  gives  us  the  result  that  it  is  not  getting  better  with  time,  the  ratio  in  2007  
is   better   than   in   2008.   The   ratio   may   be   acceptable   if   it’s   comfortably   within   1,   not  
forgetting   that   it   will   differ   according   to   industries.   The   ratios   above   show   that   inventory  
makes  only  a  humble  part  of  the  current  asset  and  it  is  quite  at  a  safe  level.  

PROFITABILITY  MEASURES  
Profit   is   believed   to   be   the   most   important   measure   of   success   in   an   organisation.  
Profitability  measures  as  to  whether  the  firm  is  employing  and  managing  its  resources  and  
operations   efficiently.   There   are   three   commonly   used   measures   of   profitability,   namely  
profit   margin,     return   on   assets   and   return   on   equity.   The   focus   in   this   group   is   on   the  
bottom   line—net   income.   For   illustration   on   these   ratios,   we   will   use   figures   from   the  
income  statement  and  the  balance  sheet  presented  above.  

P ROFIT   M ARGIN  
Companies   pay   a   great   deal   of   attention   to   their   profit   margin   this   ratio   calculates   net  
income   as   a   percentage   of   sale   revenue.   It   measures   how   much   profit   is   generated   from  
sales.  Remember  profit  is  the  excess  of  sales  revenue  over  costs  and  expenses.    

𝐍𝐞𝐭  𝐢𝐧𝐜𝐨𝐦𝐞
Profit  margin  = x  100  
𝐒𝐚𝐥𝐞𝐬

                                                                                                         
Example  –  Profit  margin  
 
𝟏𝟎𝟐,𝟓𝟎𝟎
In  2007                 𝒙𝟏𝟎𝟎 = 𝟑. 𝟓%                    
𝟐,𝟗𝟎𝟎,𝟎𝟎𝟎
   

Financial  Management     Page|  73    


 
 
The   ratio   shows   that   for   every   unit   of   currency,   3.5%   of   that   is   net   income.   If   we   take   a  
dollar  as  our  unit  of  currency,  it  means  that  for  every  dollar-­‐3.5cents  are  generated  as  net  
income.   In   this   case,   the   ratio   may   be   seen   as   low,   however   it   should   be   taken   into  
consideration   as   which   other   factors   contribute   to   such   figure,   especially   the   kind   of  
industry   the   business   is   in.   considering   how   low   the   margin   is,   an   organisation   may   take   on  
measures   to   increase   the   ratio.   Decreasing   sales   would   not   be   and   objective   decision,  
therefore  it  might  have  to  maintain  tight  control  on  its  costs  and  expenses.    

A DDITIONAL  RATIOS  

G ROSS  PROFIT  RATIO  


!"#$$  !"#$%&    
Gross  profit  Ratio  =   x100    
!"#$%

The  gross  profit  ratio  measures  the  extent  to  which  the  company  has  been  successful  in  its  
trading.  The  formula  is  as  follows  

  Example  –  Return  on  Assets  


!,!"#,!!!              
  Gross  profit  Ratio  =     !,!"",!!!
𝐱𝟏𝟎𝟎 = 𝟑𝟗. 𝟔𝟔%  

M ARK  UP   R ATIO  


The  mark-­‐up  ratio  measures  the  extent  to  which  the  gross  profit  adds  to  the  cost  of  goods  
sold  to  generate  sales.  Sales  activity  can  be  realised  by  reducing  the  mark-­‐up.  The  attempt  
to   increase   sales   activity   by   reducing   the   mark-­‐up   could   harm   the   gross   profit.   However,    
large  volume  of  sales  could  increase  the  profits.      

!"#$$  !"#$%&              
Mark  up  ratio  =     𝐱𝟏𝟎𝟎  
!"#$  !"  !""#$  !"#$

 
Example  –  mark-­‐  up  ratio  

  1,150,000              
𝐱𝟏𝟎𝟎 = 𝟑𝟗. 𝟔𝟔%  
𝟏, 𝟕𝟓𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎
 

Financial  Management     Page|  74    


 
 
N ET  PROFIT  RATIO  
This  ratio  makes  an  internal  comparison  of  the  net  profit  realised  in  a  given  period  to  the  
sales   generated   in   that   period.   Because   of   the   different   expenses   that   could   impact   the   net  
profit,  comparison  with  other  firms  may  be  a  challenge  and  would,  as  such,  require  for  an  
adjustment  to  account  for  such  differences.  

EFFICIENCY  RATIOS  
The   efficiency   ratios   allow   for  an   analysis   of   how   efficiently   the   company   is   being   managed.    
To   measure   efficiency,   comparison   is   made   between   two   periods   and   also   with   external  
companies.  Several  ratios  could  be  employed,  in  this  course  the  focus  is  on  stock  turnover,  
fixed  assets  turnover,  trade  debtor  collection  period  and  trade  creditor  payment  period.  

S TOCK  TURNOVER  RATIO  


The   stock   turnover   ratio   measures   the   number   of   times   the   company   is   able   to   turnover   its  
stock,   the   higher   the   turnover,   the   more   efficient   the   company   is   in   moving   its   stock.   A  
higher   stock   turnover   implies   that   the   company’s   funds   are   not   tied   in   non-­‐moving   stock    
items.   A   comparison   between   2   periods   should   an   indication   of   the   efficiency   in   moving  
stock   between   periods.   A   between   companies   comparison   would   give   an   indication   of  
whether  the  company  is  more  (less)  efficient  in  moving  its  stocks  relative  to  its  customers.  

!"#$  !"  !""#$  !"#$            


Stock  turnover  ratio    =      
!"#$%&'  !"#$%

 
Example  –  Stock  turn-­‐over  (in  2007)  

T          !,!"#,!!!        =  12.94  times  


!"#,!"#      

This  ratio    implies  that  the  company  has  a  little  over  a  month’  s  sales  in  stock.  

R ETURN  ON   A SSETS  


 Return   on   assets   (ROA)   is   a   measure   of   profit   per   dollar   of   assets.   It   can   be   defined   several  
ways,  but  the  most  common  is:  

𝐍𝐞𝐭  𝐢𝐧𝐜𝐨𝐦𝐞
Return  on  assets  =                        
𝐓𝐨𝐭𝐚𝐥  𝐚𝐬𝐬𝐞𝐭𝐬

Financial  Management     Page|  75    


 
 
                 
Example  –  Return  on  Assets  (in  2007)                

                 𝟏𝟎𝟐,𝟓𝟎𝟎
                    = 𝟔. 𝟗%                    
𝟏,𝟒𝟔𝟔,𝟓𝟎𝟎
 
                                         

This   ratio   measures   how   much   net   income   is   being   generated   by   the   total   assets,   this  
simply   means   how   effectively   are   the   assets   being   employed   in   order   to   generate   net  
income.  It  is  favourable  if  the  ratio  is  high,  but  the  determining  factor  is  in  which  industry  is  
the  business  in.      The  above  ratio  shows  that  for  every  unit  of  assets  dollar,69  cents  of  net  
income  is  being  generated.                                                  

R ETURN  ON   E QUITY  


This   the   measure   of   how   much   the   shareholders   fared   in   a   year   (Firer   et   al,2004).   This  
actually   shows   how   much   profit   has   been   generated   by   the   equity   invested   in   an  
organisation.  The  measure  is  calculated  as  follows  

𝐍𝐞𝐭  𝐢𝐧𝐜𝐨𝐦𝐞
Return  on  Equity  =        
!"#$%  !"#$%&  

                                                                 
Example  –  Return  on  Assets  (in  2007)                  

  𝟏𝟎𝟐,𝟓𝟎𝟎
= 𝟏𝟎. 𝟓%                    
𝟗𝟕𝟑,𝟕𝟓𝟎
 
 

T RADER  DEBTOR  COLLECTION  PERIOD  


The  trade  debtor  collection  period  measures  efficiency  of  the  company  in  collecting  from  its  
trade   debtors.   The   longer   collection   period   shows   that   the   company   takes   long   to   collect  
from  its  debtors,  and  therefore  inefficient.  The  determination  of  the  length  of  the  collection  
period  depends  of  the  company’s  debtor  collection  period.    

𝐜𝐥𝐨𝐬𝐢𝐧𝐠  𝐭𝐫𝐚𝐝𝐞  𝐝𝐞𝐛𝐭𝐨𝐫𝐬


Trade  debtors  collection  period  =     𝒙  𝟑𝟔𝟓    
!"#$%&  !"#$!

  Example  –  trade  creditor  payment  period          

A  company’s  credit  sales  for  2012  amounted  to  4452  million  and  its  trade  debtors  for  that  year  
  amounted  to  £394  million.  The  company’s  credit  policy  is  28  days.  
 
𝟑𝟗𝟒
   Debt  collection  period  =   𝒙𝟑𝟔𝟓   = 𝟑𝟐. 𝟑𝟎  𝒅𝒂𝒚𝒔  
𝟒𝟒𝟓𝟐
                 

Financial  Management     Page|  76    


 
 
In  this  case,    the  company  is  not  efficient  in  collecting  from  its  debtors.  

Other   sources   (books)   use   average   trade   debtors   instead   of   closing   trade   debtors,   i.e.                      
!
 (Opening  trade  debtors  +  closing  trade  debtors).  
!

T RADE  CREDITOR  PAYMENT  PERIOD  


Like   the   debt   collection   period,   the   management   could   be   interested   in   finding   out   the  
number  of  days  it  takes  to  pay  out  its  creditors.  Unlike  the  debt  collection  period,  a  longer  
payment   period   (of   course,   within   the   credit   contract),   indicate   the   efficiency   of   the   firm   in  
managing   its   finances.   If   the   ratio   goes   beyond   the   agreed   credit   limit,   this   would   a   red   flag  
to  indicate  that  the  company  is  struggling  to  meet  its  obligations  to  trade  creditors.  

𝐜𝐥𝐨𝐬𝐢𝐧𝐠  𝐭𝐫𝐚𝐝𝐞  𝐜𝐫𝐞𝐝𝐢𝐭𝐨𝐫𝐬


Debt  collection  period  =     𝒙  𝟑𝟔𝟓    
!"#$%  !"#$%&  !"#$%&'('

  Example  –  trade  credit  payment  period          

A  company’s  credit  purchases  for  2012  amounted  to  3200  million  and  its  trade  debtors  for  that  year  
  amounted  to  694  million.  The  credit  terms  given  to  the  company  is  50  days  
 
𝟔𝟗𝟒
     Trade  debtor  payment  period  =  𝟑𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝒙𝟑𝟔𝟓   = 𝟕𝟗  𝒅𝒂𝒚𝒔  
                 
 

The   ratio   shows   that   the   company   takes   more   than   2   months   to   meet   its   obligations   to   the  
trade  creditors.  Failure  to  meet  credit  payment  terms  could  result  in  loss  of  credit  purchase.  
This  could  put  a  strain  on  the  company’s  cash  position  as  the  company  is  required  to  make  
cash  purchases.  

Note  that,  the  credit  purchases  figure  is  normally  not  provided  in  the  published  accounts.  
You  could  calculate  the  cost  of  sales  and  assume  that  the  purchases  were  on  credit  and  also  
that  expenses  have  not  been  included  in  the  cost  of  sales,  unless  otherwise  stated,  in  which  
case   they   must   be   excluded.     Average   trade   creditors   could   be   used   as   in   the   debtors  
collection  period  above.  

Financial  Management     Page|  77    


 
 

INVESTMENT  RATIOS                    
The   investment   ratios   are   particularly   of   interest   to   the   investors   as   they   inform   the  
investors  of  how  well  their  investment  in  the  company  pays  off.  This  group  of  ratios  covers  
earnings  per  share,  price  earnings  and  capital  gearing  ratios.    

E ARNINGS  PER  SHARE  


The  earnings  per  share  ratio  tells  the  percentage  of  dividends  that  are  due  to  the  ordinary  
share  holders  after  the  tax  and    preference  share  holders  have  been  paid.    The  earnings  are  
compared   to   the   of   shares   at   a   point   in   time.   Using   the   financial   statements   above,   the  
earnings  per  share    is  calculated  as:  

𝐧𝐞𝐭  𝐢𝐧𝐜𝐨𝐦𝐞
Earnings  per  share    =        
!"#$%&  !"  !"#$%&"'  !"#$%!

  Example  –  Earnings  per  share          

𝟏𝟒, 𝟏𝟎𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎


  = 𝟏𝟒. 𝟏    
𝟏, 𝟎𝟎𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎
 

P RICE  TO  EARNINGS  RATIO  


Share  holders  can  compare  earnings  per  share  with  their  stock  market  price  to  see  if  there  
are  any  gains  from  their  investment.  The  price  to  earnings  ratio  assess  the  number  of  times  
the  market  price  in  the  earnings.  This  is  indicative  of  the  number  of  years    it  will  take  the  
investor  to  recover  their  investment  in  shares  from    the  earnings.  A  comparison  of  the  ratio  
with   other   companies   would   reveal   if   the   investor   is   worse   off   investing   in   the   company.  
High  P/E  ratio  is  indicative    of  a  good  future  as  the  shares  prices  are  high  and  the  company  
might  be  able  to  pay  higher  dividends    in  future.  The  ratio  is  calculated  as:  

𝐦𝐚𝐫𝐤𝐞𝐭  𝐩𝐫𝐢𝐜𝐞  𝐩𝐞𝐫  𝐬𝐡𝐚𝐫𝐞


Price  earnings  ratio    =        
!"#$%$&'  !"#  !"#$%

C APITAL  GEARING  RATIO  


This  ratio  examines  the  extent  to  which  the  company  is  financed  on  loans  (long  term  loans  
and  preference  shares)    relative  to  share  holders  funds.  The  risk  associated  with  financing  
the   company   from   high   loans   is   that   the   company   will   have   to   pay   high   interest   and   thus  
reduce   its   ability   to   meet   the   ordinary   share   holders’   dividends.   The   other   risk   of   relying   on  
high   loans   to   finance   the   company   is   that,   when   the   company   becomes   liquidated,   the  

Financial  Management     Page|  78    


 
 
ordinary   share   holders   can   only   be   paid   after   all   the   creditors   have   been   paid.   So   if   the  
company   is   not   able   to   pay   its   creditors,   there   is   a   danger   that   the   shareholders   will   not   be  
paid.    

𝐩𝐫𝐞𝐟𝐞𝐫𝐞𝐧𝐜𝐞  𝐬𝐡𝐚𝐫𝐞𝐬!𝐥𝐨𝐧𝐠!𝐭𝐞𝐫𝐦  𝐥𝐨𝐚𝐧𝐬


Capital  gearing  ratio    =      
!"#$%  !"#$%&'! !"#$%!!"#$  !"#$  !"#$%

TOPIC  SUMMARY  
This  topic  has  taken  you  through  the  analysis  of  financial  statements,  mainly  following  on  
the   financial   statement   examples   given   in   the   preceding   topic.   Four   types   of   ratios   have  
been   introduced   in   this   topic   and   the   formula   for   calculating   these   ratios   have   been  
presented   with   examples.   This   should   enable   you     to   complete   the   topic   reflection  
questions  presented  below.  

Self-­‐Reflection  Questions          

1.  Calculate  the  appropriate  liquidity,  profitability,  efficiency  and    investment  ratios  


for  both  2011  and  2012      

2.  Comment  on  the  company’s  financial  performance  for  the  year  ended  31st  March  
2012                                                                                                                                                                                                            

Financial  Management     Page|  79    


 
 

Additional  information:  

1  All  sales  and  all  purchases  are  on  credit  terms.  

2  The  opening  stock  at  1  April  2010  was  £20,000.  

3  There  were  no  accruals  or  prepayments  at  the  end  of  either  2011  or  2012.  

4  Assume  that  both  the  tax  and  the  dividends  had  been  paid  before  the  end  of  the  year.  

Financial  Management     Page|  80    


 
 
5  The  market  price  of  the  ordinary  shares  at  the  end  of  both  years  was  estimated  to  

be  126p  and  297p  respectively.  

Source:  Dyson  (2010,  pp  233  –  238)  

   

Financial  Management     Page|  81    


 
 

TOPIC  3.3  STATEMENT  OF  CASH  FLOWS  

TOPIC    3.3  INTRODUCTION  

Other  than  the  financial  position  of  the  company,  management  is  also  concerned  with  the  
changes   in   the   cash   account   over   time.   The   purpose   of   this   topic   is   to   highlight   the  
importance  of  presenting  the  state  of  affairs  of  the  cash  and  cash   equivalents    as  one  of  the  
financial   statements   in   a   company.   Because   of   the   high   liquidity   of   cash   and   cash  
equivalents,  the  inflow  and  out  flow  of  these  assets  need  to  be  efficiently  managed  to  avoid  
paying  out  too  much  cash  that  what    is  coming  in.  

TOPIC  3.3  OBJECTIVES  

At  the  end  of  the  topic,  the  students  will  be  able  to:  

1. Distinguish  the  different  types  of  cash  flows  


2. Prepare  a  cash  flow  statement    
3. Analyse    and  interpret  the  cash  flows  of  a  business  

CASH  FLOWS    

Cash   flows   are   a   revenue   or   expense   stream   that   changes   a   cash   account  of   the   business  
over  a  given  period.  Figure  8  illustrates  the  cash  flows  of  business.  It  is  important  to  note  
that  marketable  securities,  because  of  their  highly  liquid  nature,  are  considered  the  same  as  
cash.  Both  cash  and  marketable  securities  represent  a  reservoir  of  liquidity  that  is  increased  
by   cash   inflows   and   decreased   by   cash   outflows.   Cash   flows   can   be   divided   into   three   types  
(1)  operating,  (2)  investment  and  (3)  financing.  

The  operating  flows  are  directly  related  to  sale  and  production  of  the  products  and  services.  
Investment   flows   are   associated   with   purchase   and   sale   of   fixed   assets   and   business  
interests.  Therefore,  it  is  clear  that  the  purchase  transactions  would  result  in  cash  outflows,  
whereas  sales  transactions  would  result  in  cash  inflows.  The  financing  flows  are  a  result  of  
debt   and   equity   financing   transactions.   Incurring   or   repaying   debt   would   result   in   a  
corresponding  cash  inflow  or  outflow.  Similarly,  cash  inflow  would  be  the  result  of  sale  of  
stock;  the  payment  of  cash  dividends  or  repurchase  of  stock  would  result  in  an  outflow.  

Financial  Management     Page|  82    


 
 
Figure  8:  The  cash  flows  of  a  business  

Source:  Gitman  et  al.    (2012)  

PRESENTATION  OF  THE  C ASH  FLOW  STATEMENT  (IAS  7)  


The   requirements   for   the   presentation   of   the   cash   flow   statement   is   stipulated   in   the  
international   accounting   standard   (IAS)   7.     Generally   the   information   for   the   preparation   of  
the   cash   flow   statement     is   drawn   from   other   accounting   and   financial   statements,     such   as  
the  manufacturing  account,  the  trading  account,  the  profit  and  loss  account,  the  profit  and  
loss  appropriation  account  and  the  balance  sheet.    

Figure  9  shows  that  the  cash  flow  statement  utilises  information  from  seven  sources  in  the  
financial   statements.   First,   manufacturing   cost     paid   from   the   manufacturing   account.  
Secondly,   cash   received   from   customers   and   cash   paid   to   suppliers   from   the   trading  
account.  Thirdly,    information  on  other  cash  and  receipts  and  payments  from  the  profit  and  
loss   account.   Fourthly,   information   on   tax   paid   and   dividends   paid   from   the     profit   and   loss  
appropriation   account.   Fifthly,   information   on   cash,   bank   balances,   capital   expenditure   and  
capital  income    from  the  balance  sheet  statement.    

Financial  Management     Page|  83    


 
 
Figure  9:The  interrelationship  between  cash  flow  statement  and  other  financial  statements  

Source:  Dyson  (2010)  

Given   the   diverse   sources   of   information   for   preparation   of   the   cash   flow   statement,   the  
statement  could  be  prepared  by  using  either  direct  or  indirect      or  indirect  methods.  On  one  
hand,   the   direct   method     summarises   all   the   cash   book   entries.   On   the   other   hand     indirect  
method    uses  information  from  the  profit  and  loss  and  the  balance  sheet  accounts.  Dyson  
(2010)   gives   succinct   examples   on   this   two   methods,   which   we   will   use   to   illustrate   the  
difference  between  the  two  methods.  

Table  7:  Example  for  direct  method    

Financial  Management     Page|  84    


 
 

Source:  Dyson  (2010,  pp  148  –  149)  

Financial  Management     Page|  85    


 
 
Table  8:  Example  for    indirect  method  

Financial  Management     Page|  86    


 
 

Source:  Dyson  (2010,  pp  151  –  152)  

ANALYZING  THE  CASH  FLOW  OF  A  BUSINESS  


Cash   flow   is   the   primary   focus   of  the   financial   manager   both   in   managing   finances   and   in  
planning   and   decision   making   aimed   at   value   creation   of   business.   Important   factors  
affecting   cash   flow   are   any   non-­‐cash   charges   e.g.   depreciation.   From   an   accounting  
perspective,   cash   flows   of   a   business   can   be   summarized   in   the   statement   of   cash   flows.  
Whereas,   from   a   financial   perspective,   business   often   focus   on   both   operating   cash   flow,  
and  free  cash  flow.  Operating  cash  flow  is  used  in  managerial  decision  making  and  free  cash  
flow  is  closely  watched  by  investors  and  other  parties.  In  accounting  terms,  operating  cash  
flow  can  be  defined  as:  

Operating  Cash  flow  =  Net  profits  after  taxes+  Depreciation  and  other  noncash  charges  

Or  

OCF  =  NPAT  +  Depreciation  and  other  noncash  charges  

Financial  Management     Page|  87    


 
 
I NTERPRETATION  OF   C ASH  FLOW   S TATEMENT  
The   statement   of   cash   flows   allows   the   financial   manager   and   other   interested  
parties   to   analyze   the   firm’s   cash   flow.   The   major   categories   of   cash   flow   and   the  
individual   items   of   cash   inflow   and   outflow   needs   special   attention     to   assess  
whether   any   developments   have   occurred   are   in   line   with   company’s   financial  
policies.   In   addition,   the   statement   can   be   used   to   evaluate   progress   toward  
planned   goals   or   to   check   inefficiencies.   For   example,   the   increase   in   account  
receivable   and   inventory   results   in   major   cash   out   flows,   and   credit   or   inventory  
problems   may   be   singled   with   this   respectively.   Using   projected   financial  
statements,  the  financial  manager  can  also  develop  a  projected  statement  of  cash  
flows.   This   approach   can   be   used   to   determine   whether   planned   actions   are  
desirable  in  view  of  the  resulting  cash  flows.  An  understanding  of  the  basic  financial  
principles  is  extremely  essential  to  the  effective  interpretation  of  the  statement    of  
cash  flows.  

O PERATING   C ASH   F LOW  


Operating   cash   flow   (OCF)   of   a   business   is   generated   by   its   normal   operations   of  
producing   and   selling   its   output   of   goods   or   services.   A   variety   of   definitions   of   OCF  
can  be  found  in  the  financial  literature.  Equation  introduced  the  simple  accounting  
definition  of  cash  flow  from  operations.  Here  we  refine  this  definition  to  estimate  
cash  flows  more  accurately.  Unlike  the  earlier  definition,  this  one  excludes  interest  
and   taxes   in   order   to   focus   on   the   true   cash   flow   resulting   from   operations   without  
regard   to   financing   costs   and   taxes.   Operating   cash   flow   (OCF)   .in   financial  
management  terms  it  is  defined  in  following  equation:  

Operating  Cash  flow    =  Earning  before  interests  and  taxes  -­‐  Taxes+  Depreciation  

Or  

OCF  =  EBIT  –Taxes  +  Depreciation    

Financial  Management     Page|  88    


 
 
Comparing   the   two   Equations   reveal   that   the   major   difference   between   the  
accounting   and   finance   definitions   of   operating   cash   flow   is   that   the   finance  
definition   excludes   interest   as   an   operating   flow,   whereas   the   accounting   definition  
in   effect   includes   it.   In   the   unlikely   case   that   a   firm   had   no   interest   expense,   the  
accounting  and  finance  definitions  of  operating  cash  flow  would  be  the  same.  

F REE   C ASH   F LOW  


The   free   cash   flow   (FCF)   of   a   business   is   the   amount   of   cash   flow   available   to  
investors—the  providers  of  debt  (creditors)  and  equity  (owners)—after  the  firm  has  
met  all  operating  needs  and  paid  for  investments  in  net  fixed  assets  and  net  current  
assets.  Free  cash  flow  can  be  defined  in  equation  form  as:  

Free   cash   flow   =   Operating   Cash   Flow   -­‐Net   fixed   asset   investment   -­‐   Net   current  
asset  investment  

Or  

FCF  =  OCF  –  NFAI  -­‐  NCAI  

The  net  fixed  asset  investment  can  be  calculated  as  follows:  

net  fixed  asset  investment  (NFAI)  =  Change  in  net  fixed  assets  +Depreciation  

Further  analysis  of  free  cash  flow  is  beyond  the  scope  of  this  introductory  course.  
Clearly,  cash  flow  is  the  lifeblood  of  the  business.    

SUMMARY  

This   topic   had   set   out   to   introduce   you   to   the   statement   of   cash   flows.   Specifically   the  
different   types   of   cash   flows   have   been   explained.   The   two   methods   used   to   present   the  
cash  flow  statement  have  been  presented  and  examples  given  for  each  method.  

   

Financial  Management     Page|  89    


 
 

Self-­‐Reflection  Questions          

1. What  are  the    3  types  of  cash  flows                  

2. Explain  the  differences  and  similarities  between  the  methods  of  preparing    a  
cash  flow  statement                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            

UNIT  3  REFERENCES  

1. International Accounting Standards Board (2009)   Presentation   of   Financial  


statements   in   http://www.iasplus.com/en/standards/standard5   accessed   23rd  
April  2013  
2. Subramanyam,  K.R.  and  Wild  John.  J  (2009)  Financial  Statement  analysis,  10TH  Edition    
McGraw-­‐Hill   Irwin,     New   York.   –in   http://highered.mcgraw-­‐
hill.com/sites/dl/free/0073379433/597452/Subramanyam_fsa_sample_Ch01.pdf  
accessed  23/04/2013  
3. Dyson,   John   R.   (2010)   Accounting   for   non   accounting   Students.   Pearson   Education  
Limited.   Harlow.     In   http://web.kku.ac.th/chrira/Non%20Acct.%20Dyson.pdf   accessed  
26/04/2013  
4. IFRS   (2012)   Illustrative   Financial   Statements.   KPMG.   In  
http://www.kpmg.com/Global/en/IssuesAndInsights/ArticlesPublications/IFRS-­‐
illustrative-­‐financial-­‐statements/Documents/IFRS-­‐illustrative-­‐financial-­‐statements-­‐
2012.pdf  accessed  29/04/2013  
5. Stolowy,   H.   And   Lebas,   Michel   J.   (2002)   Corporate   Financial   Reporting   –   A   Global  
Perspective.  Thomson  Learning.  London.    –  Chapters  2  and    3  
6. Subramanyam,  K.R.  and  Wild  John.  J  (2009)  Financial  Statement  analysis,  10TH  Edition    
McGraw-­‐Hill   Irwin,     New   York.   –   Chapter   1   in   http://highered.mcgraw-­‐
hill.com/sites/dl/free/0073379433/597452/Subramanyam_fsa_sample_Ch01.pdf  
accessed  23/04/2013  
7. http://studentweb.usq.edu.au/home/W0054016/Pages/Financial_Acct_Folder/Exampl
e_Comprehensive_Income_Statement.htm  

Financial  Management     Page|  90    


 
 

UNIT  3  -­‐  SUMMARY  


ASSIGNMENTS  AND  ACTIVITIES  

The   end   of   topic   assignment   is   to   be   developed   by   the   participating   institutions   to   assess  


student   learning   for   this   unit.   Generally   the   students   should   be   required   to   demonstrate  
their  understanding  of  the  nature  of  financial  statements,  as  well  as  to  show  that  they  could  
competently  analyse  and  interpret  the  various  financial  statements  covered  in  this  unit.  

SUMMARY  

This   unit   has   covered   topics   that   will   enable   you   to   present   and   analyse   three   important  
financial   statements,   namely;   the   statement   of   comprehensive   income,   statement   of  
financial   position   and   the   statement   of   cash   flows.   Examples   have   been   provided,   where  
feasible  to  enable  you  to  internalise  the  various  topics.  The  reflective  questions  at  the  end  
of  each  topic  are  designed  to  consolidate  the  student  learning.    Having  gone  through  this  
material,  you  should  therefore  be  well  equipped  to  tackle  the  end  of  unit  assignment.  

NEXT  STEPS  

Now  that  you  have  acquired  skills  and    knowledge  of  analysis  of  the    financial  statements,  
the  next  unit  takes  you  a  step  further  by  introducing    you  to  the  financial  planning  process.    

   

Financial  Management     Page|  91    


 
 

UNIT  FOUR  -­‐  FINANCIAL  PLANNING    


UNIT  4  INTRODUCTION  

Financial   planning   is   an   important   aspect   because   it   provides   road   maps   for   guiding,  
coordinating   and   controlling   the   actions   to   achieve   the   objectives   of   the   business.     Major  
aspects   of   the   financial   planning   process   are   cash   planning   and   profit   planning.   Cash  
planning   involves   preparation   of   the   cash   budget   whereas,   profit   planning   involves  
preparation   of   pro   forma   statements.   The   cash   budget   and   the   pro   forma   statements   are  
useful  for  internal  financial  planning  as  well  as  they  are  routinely  required  by  present  and  
future   lenders.   Long-­‐term,   or   strategic,   financial   plans   are   the   starting   point   of   the   financial  
planning   process.   The   strategic   plans   in   turn   help   in   the   formulation   of   short-­‐term,   or  
operating,  plans  and  budgets.  Generally,  the  short-­‐term  plans  and  budgets  implement  the    
long  term  strategic  objectives  of  a  business.    

UNIT  4  OBJECTIVES  

Upon  completion  of  this  unit  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Understand   the   process   of   financial   planning,   including   strategic   financial   plans  


(long-­‐term  plans)  and  operating  financial  plans  (short-­‐term  plans).  
2. Discuss  the  process  of  cash  planning  and  the  preparation,  evaluation  and  use  of  the  
cash  budget.  
3. Explain   the   simplified   procedures   used   to   prepare   and   evaluate   the   pro   forma  
financial  statements.  
4. Identify  the  limitations  of  the  simplified  approaches  to  the  preparation  of  pro  forma  
financial  statement  and  the  common  uses  of  these  statements.  

UNIT  4  READINGS  

To    complete  this  unit,  you  are  required  to  read  the  following  chapters:  

Gitman  et  al.  (2012  or  2002),    chapters  14  and  15  

UNIT  4  ASSIGNMENTS  AND  ACTIVITIES  

Self-­‐reflection  questions  are  given  at  the  end  of  each  topic.  Guidance  on  a  comprehensive  
assignment  for  the  unit  will  be  provided  by  the  instructor.    

   

Financial  Management     Page|  92    


 
 

TOPIC  4.1  –  INTRODUCTION  TO  FINANCIAL  PLANNING  

TOPIC    4.1  INTRODUCTION  


Financial   planning   is   an   important   aspect   because   it   acts   as   a   guide   to   achieve   the   key  
objectives  of  the  business.    Cash  planning  and  profit  planning  are  the  two  major  aspects  of  
the  financial  planning  process.  There  are  two  main  types  of  a  financial  plan  which  include  
the   strategic   plans   and   the   operating   plans.   Strategic   (Long-­‐term)   financial   plans   act   as   a  
guide  for  preparing  short-­‐term  (operating)  financial  plans  and  tend  to  cover  periods  ranging  
from  2  to  10  years  and  are  updated  periodically.  On  the  other  hand  the  operational  plans  
most  often  cover  a  1  to  2  year  period.  

TOPIC  4.1  OBJECTIVES  


Upon  completion  of  this  topic  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Understand  the  nature  of  financial  planning  process.    


2. Identify   the   nature   of   including   strategic   financial   plans   (long-­‐term   plans)   and  
operating  financial  plans  (short-­‐term  plans).  

STRATEGIC  FINANCIAL  PLANS    


Strategic   (Long-­‐term)   financial   plans   includes   the   planned   financial   actions   and   the  
expected   impact   of   those   actions   over   periods   ranging   from   2   to   10   years.   Five-­‐year  
strategic   plans   are   also   very   common   and   they   are   revised   as   significant   new   information  
becomes   available.   Generally,   businesses   with   high   degrees   of   operating   uncertainty,  
relatively  short  production  cycles,  or  both,  are  likely  to  use  shorter  planning  horizons.  

Long-­‐term  financial  plans  are  part  of  an  integrated  strategy  which  includes  production  and  
marketing   plans,   and   guides   the   businesses   toward   strategic   goals.   Those   long-­‐term   plans  
consider  proposed  expenditure  for  fixed  assets,  research  and  development,  marketing  and  
product   development,   capital   structure,   and   major   sources   of   financing.   It   also   includes  
termination   of   any   existing   projects,   product   lines,   or   lines   of   business;   repayment   or  
retirement   of   outstanding   debts;   and   any   planned   acquisitions.   Such   plans   needs   to   be  
supported  by  a  sequence  of  annual  budgets  and  profit  plans.  

OPERATING  FINANCIAL  PLANS  

Operating(Short-­‐term)  financial  plans  indicate  short-­‐term  financial  actions  and  the  expected  
impact   of   those   actions   over   1   to   2   year   period.   Key   information   required   to   prepare   the  
operating  financial    plan  is  the  sales  forecast  and  various  forms  of  operating  and  financial  
data.   Examples   of   short   term   financial   plans   which   are   also   known   as   the   output   of   the  
process   are   the   operating   budgets,   the   cash   budget,   and   pro   forma   financial   statements.  
The   short   term   financial   planning   process   is   depicted   in   the   Figure.   sales   forecast   is   the  
starting   point   of   the   process   of   short-­‐term   financial   planning.   Next,   production   plans   are  

Financial  Management     Page|  93    


 
 
developed  that  considers  the  production  times  and  include  estimates  of  the  required  raw  
materials.   Based   on   production   plans,   the   firm   can   easily   estimate   direct   labour  
requirements,   factory   overhead,   and   operating   expenses.   Next,   the   firm’s   pro   forma  
income   statement   and   cash   budget   can   be   prepared   and   finally,   the   pro   forma   balance  
sheet  can  be  developed.    

Figure  10:  Short  term  Financial  Planning  process  

  Sales   Information  needed  


Forecast   Output  for  Analysis  
 

 
Long-­‐Term  
Production  
  Financing  
Plans  
Plans  
  Forecast  

  Pro-­‐forma   Cash   Fixed  Asset  


Income   Budget   Outlay  plan  
  Statement  
Current-­‐Period  
 
Balance  Sheet  
  Pro-­‐forma  
Balance  
  Sheet  

Source:  Gitman  et  al.    (2012)  

SUMMARY  

Strategic  plans  and  the  operating  plans  are  the  two  major  types  of  financial  plan.  Strategic  
(long-­‐term)  financial  plans  are  a  guide  for  preparing  operating  (short-­‐term)  financial  plans.  
Long-­‐term   plans   are   likely   to   cover   periods   ranging   from   2   to   10   years   and   are   always  
updated  periodically.  Whereas,  short-­‐term  plans  cover  a  1  to  2  year  period.  

Self-­‐Reflection  Questions  

1.   What   is   the   financial   planning   process?   Contrast   strategic   (long-­‐term)   financial   plans   and  
operating  (short-­‐term)  financial  plans.  

2.   Which   three   statements   result   as   part   of   the   operating   (short-­‐term)   financial   planning  
process?  

Financial  Management     Page|  94    


 
 

TOPIC  4.2  -­‐  CASH  BUDGETS  FOR  CASH  PLANNING  


TOPIC  4.2  INTRODUCTION  
Cash  budget  are  based  on  a  sales  forecast  and  are  used  in  the  process  of  cash  planning  to  
estimate  short  term  cash  surpluses  and  shortages.  Usually,  the  cash  budgets  are  prepared  
for  a  period  covering  1  year  and  is  further  divided  into  months.  The  two  major  components  
of  a  cash  budgets  are  the  net  cash  receipts  and  the  net  cash  disbursements.    

TOPIC  4.2  OBJECTIVES  

Upon  completion  of  this  topic  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Discuss  the  process  of  cash  planning.  


2. Prepare,  evaluate  and  use  the  cash  budget.  

WHAT  IS  A  CASH  BUDGET  

The   cash   budget,   also   known   as   cash   forecast,   is   a   statement   of   planned   inflows   and  
outflows   of   cash   of   a   business.   It   is   used   to   estimate   short-­‐term   cash   requirements   of   a  
business,   with   particular   attention   to   planning   for   surplus   cash   and   for   cash   shortages.  
Usually,   the   cash   budget   covers   a   1-­‐year   period   and   it   is   divided   into   smaller   time   intervals.  
The  number  and  type  of  intervals  are  decided  on  the  basis  of  nature  of  the  business.  If  the  
business   is   seasonal   and   has   uncertain   cash   flows   the   number   of   intervals   are   greater.  
Because   many   businesses   have   a   seasonal   cash   flow   pattern,   the   cash   budget   is   often  
presented   on   a   monthly   basis.   On   the   other   hand,   businesses   with   established   and   stable  
patterns  of  cash  flow  prefers  to  use  quarterly  or  annual  time  intervals.  

THE  SALES  FORECAST  

The  important  input  to  the  process  of  short-­‐term  financial  planning  is  the  sales  forecast  of  a  
business.  marketing  department  is  responsible  for  predicting  the  sales  over  a  given  period.  
Based  on  the  sales  forecast,  the  financial  manager  then  estimates  the  cash  flows  that  will  
result   from   forecasted   sales   receipts   and   from   cost   related   to   production,   inventory,   and  
sales.  Financial  manager  is  also  responsible  to  determine  the  level  of  fixed  assets  required  
and  the  amount  of  financing,  if  any,  needed  to  support  the  forecasted  sales  and  production.  
In   practice,   the   most   challenging   aspect   of   forecasting   is   to   obtain   high-­‐quality   data.   An  
analysis   of   external   data,   internal   data,   or   a   combination   of   the   two   may   be   the   basis   of  
sales.  

The   observation   of   relationships   between   the   sales   of   a   business   and   some   key   external  
economic  indicators  such  as  the  gross  domestic  product,  disposable  personal  income,  and  
consumer   confidence   are   the   basis   of   an   external   forecast.   Forecasts   containing   these  
indicators  are  easily  available  and  a  forecast  of  economic  activity  should  help  in  predicting  

Financial  Management     Page|  95    


 
 
future   sales   of   the   business   because   sales   of   the   business   are   often   closely   related   to   some  
characteristics  of  overall  national  economic  activity.  

Internal  forecasts  are  based  on  a  build  up  of  sales  forecasts  through  the  sales  channels  of  
the   business.   Usually,   the   salespeople   of   the   business   in   the   field   are   asked   to   estimate   the  
number   of   units   of   each   product   the   business   expect   to   sell   in   the   given   time   in   future.   The  
sales   manager   then   collect   and   total   the   forecasts   and   may   adjust   the   figures   by   utilizing  
the   knowledge   of   specific   markets   or   the   forecasting   abilities   of   salespersons.   Based   on   this  
adjustments  for  additional  internal  factors  such  as  production  capabilities  may  be  made.    

the  final  sales  forecast  of  the  businesses  are  typically  made  by  combining  the  external  and  
internal   forecast   data.   The   internal   data   provide   information   about   future   sales  
expectations  whereas,  the  external  data  offer  ways  to  adjust  the  sale  expectations  by  taking  
into  account  general  economic  conditions.  The  nature  of  the  product,  a  business  offers,  also  
often  affects  the  combination  and  types  of  forecasting  methods  to  be  used.    

PREPARING  THE  CASH  BUDGET  

The   common   format   of   the   cash   budget   is   presented   below.   The   individual   discussion   of  
each  of  the  components  of  cash  budgets  is  as  follows.  

Table  9:  Cash    budget  format  

Financial  Management     Page|  96    


 
 

CASH  RECEIPTS  

Total  inflows  of  cash  of  a  business  in  a  given  financial  period  is  regarded  as  Cash  receipts.  
The   common   examples   of   cash   receipts   are   cash   based   sales,   collections   of   accounts  
receivable  and  other  receipts  of  cash.  

Financial  Management     Page|  97    


 
 
 
Example  –Cash  Receipts  
 
Mere  Limited   is  developing  a  cash  budget  for   January,  February  and  March.  Sales  of  
Mere   Limited   in   November   and   December   were200,   000   and   400,000   respectively.  
Sales  of   800,  000;  600,   000  and400,  000  have   been  forecast  for   January,  February  and  
March   respectively.   Historically,   20%   of   the   sales   were   on   cash   basis,   50%   were   on  
credit  basis  (accounts  receivable  collected  after  1  month)  and  the  remaining  30%  were  
on   credit   basis   as   well   (accounts   receivable   collected   after   2   months).   Bad-­‐debt   (the  
uncollectible  accounts)  have  been  negligible.  During  the  m onth  of  March,  the  business  
will   receive   a   60,   000   dividend   from   stock   in   one   of   its   subsidiary.   The   schedule   of  
expected  cash  receipts  of  the  business  is  presented  in  Table:    
 

 
 
• Forecast  sales:  provided  as  an  aid  in  calculating  other  sales-­‐related  items.  
• Cash   sales:   represent   20%   of   the   total   sales   forecast   of   the   business   for   that  
month.  
• Collections  of  Account  Receivables:  represent  the  collection  resulting  from  sales  in  
earlier  months.  
• Lagged  1  month:   represent   the   sales   made   in   the   preceding   month   and   generated  
accounts  receivable  which  are  collected  in  the  current  month.  (50%  of  the  current  
month’s  sales  are  collected  in  the  next  month).  
• Lagged   2   months:  represent  the  sales  of  the  business  made  2  months  earlier  and  
generated  accounts  receivable  (30%  of  sales  are  collected  2  months  later).  
• Other  cash  receipts:  receipts  expected  from  sources  other  than  sales  e.g.  interest,  
dividends   received,   sale   of   equipment,   stock   and   bond   sale   proceeds   and   lease  
receipts.  For  Mere  Limited,  the  only  other  cash  receipt  is  the  60,000  dividend  due  in  
December.  
• Total  cash  receipts:  represents  the   total   of   all  cash   receipts   listed  for   each   month.  
For   Mere   Limited,   we   are   concerned   only   with   January,   February   and   March   as  
shown  in  the  Table.  

Financial  Management     Page|  98    


 
 

CASH  DISBURSEMENTS  
Total   outflow   of   cash   of   a   business   during   a   given   financial   period   is   known   as   cash  
disbursement.   The   most  common   cash   disbursements   are   Cash   based   purchases,   outlays   of  
fixed-­‐asset,   Payments   of   accounts   payable,   payments   of   Interest,   payments   of   Rent   and  
lease,  payments  of  Cash  dividend,  payments  of  Wages  and  salaries,  payments  of  Principal  
loans  ,  payments  of  Tax,  etc.  It  is  essential  to  identify  that  depreciation,  a  non  cash  expense  
and  other  noncash  charges  cannot  be  included  in  the  cash  budget,  because  they  represent  
a   scheduled   write-­‐off   of   cash   outflow   occurred   earlier.   The   reduced   cash   outflow   for   tax  
payments  reflects  the  impact  of  depreciation.  

Example  –  Cash  Disbursements    

Mere   Limited   has   collected   the   following   data   for   the   preparation   of   a   cash  
disbursements  schedule  for  January,  F ebruary  and  M arch.  
1. Purchases  of  the  business  represent  70%  of  sales.  Out  of  this  amount,  10%  is  
paid   in   cash,   70%   is   paid   in   the   month   immediately   following   the   month   of  
purchase,   and   the   remaining   20%   is   paid   2   months   following   the   month   of  
purchase.  
2. Each  month  10,000  of  Rent  will  be  paid.  
3. Cost  of  fixed  salary  for  the  year  is  192,000  or  16,000  per  month.  And  10%  of  
monthly  sales  are  estimated  as  wages.  
4. Taxes  of  50,000  must  be  paid  in  December.  
5. New  machinery  costing  260,000  will  be  purchased  and  paid  for  in  February.  
6. Interest  payment  of  20,000  is  due  in  March.  
7. Cash  dividends  of  40,000  will  be  paid  in  Jan.  
8. 40,000  principal  payment  (Loan)  is  due  in  March.  
9. No  repurchase  or  retirement  of  stock  is  expected  between  January  and  March.  
The   cash   disbursements   schedule   of   the   business,   using   collected   data,   is   shown  
below.    

   

Financial  Management     Page|  99    


 
 
 
• Purchases:   represent   70%   of   the   forecast   sales   for   each   month   and   provided   to  
  facilitate  calculation  of  the  cash  purchases  and  related  payments.  
• Cash  purchases:  represent  10%  of  the  a  m onth’s  total  purchases.  
  • Payments   of   Accounts   Payable:   represent   the   payment  of   accounts   payable  as   a  
result  of  purchases  in  earlier  months.  
• Lagged   1   month:   represent   purchases   made   in   the   preceding   months,   which   are  
paid  for  in  the  current  month  (70%  of  the  purchases  are  paid  1  month  later).  
• Lagged  2   months:   represent  the  purchases  made  2  m onths  earlier  that  are  paid  for  
in  the  current  month  (20%  of  the  purchases  are  paid  for  2  months  later).  
• Wages   and   salaries:   obtained  by  adding  16,000  to10%   of   the   sales  in   each  month.  
The  16,000  represents  the  salary  component  and  the  remaining  amount  represents  
wages.  
• Rest  of  the  items  on  the  schedule  of  cash  disbursements  are  self-­‐explanatory.  

NET  CASH  FLOW ,  ENDING  CASH,  FINANCING  AND  EXCESS  CASH  


Looking  back  at  the  typical  format  of  cash  budget  in  Table  above,  we  can  now  input  the  first  
two   entries,   and   can   continue   calculating   the   cash   needs   of   the   business.   The   net   cash   flow  
can   be   calculated   by   taking   out   the   difference   cash   disbursements   from   cash   receipts   for  
each  period.  Next,  we  can  add  beginning  cash  balance  to  the  net  cash  flow  of  the  business  
to   figure   out   the   ending   cash   in   each   period.   Finally,   by   subtracting   the   minimum   desired  
balance  of  cash  from  ending  cash  balance  to  determine  the  total  financing  required  or  the  
excess   balance   of   cash.   Financing   is   required,   in   case   the   ending   cash   balance   is   less   than  
the  desired  minimum  cash  balance.  This  type  of  financing  is  represented  by  notes  payable  
because  generally  it  is  considered  as  short-­‐term  financing.  In  case  the  ending  cash  is  greater  
than  the  desired  minimum  balance  of  cash,  excess  cash  exists.  Any  available  excess  cash  is  
to   be   invested   in   a   short-­‐term,   highly   liquid,   interest-­‐paying   instrument   e.g.   marketable  
securities.  

 
Example  –Cash  Budget  
 
The  cash  budget  of  Mere  Limited  is  presented,  based  on  the  data  already  developed.  
  At   the   end   of   December,   cash   balance   of   Mere   Limited   was   100,000,   and   its   notes  
payable  and  marketable  securities  equalled   0.  As  a  reserve  for  unexpected  needs,   the  
  business  plans  to  maintain  a  minimum  cash  balance  of  50,000.  
 
 
 

 
 

Financial  Management     Page|  


    100    
 
 

EVALUATING  THE  CASH  BUDGET  


The  cash  budget  specifies  the  expected  cash  shortage  or  surplus  in  each  of  the  months  or  
interval   covered   by   the   forecast.   The   figure   for   each   month   or   interval   is   based   on   the  
required   internal   requirement   of   a   minimum   cash   balance   and   it   represents   the   total  
available  cash  balance  at  the  end  of  the  month  or  interval.  

At   the   end   of   every   3   months,   Mere   Ltd   expects   the   following   balances   of   cash,   marketable  
securities  and  notes  payable:  

 
The   important   point   to   note   here   is   that   the   business   has   assumed   to   liquidate   its  
marketable   securities   in   first   place   to   meet   deficits   and   then   if   additional   financing   is  
needed   it   can   borrow   with   notes   payable.   As   a   result   of   this   assumption,   it   will   not   be  
possible   for   the   business   to   have   marketable   securities   and   notes   payable   on   its   books  
present   at   the   same   time.   In   the   case   above,   where   during   the   3   months   interval,   up   to  
152,000   may   become   necessary   to   borrow   therefore,   the   financial   manager   should   be  
aware  of  the  fact  that  some  arrangement  is  to  be  made  to  ensure  the  availability  of  these  
funds.  

MANAGING  THE  UNCERTAINTY  IN  THE  CASH  BUDGET  


In  addition  to  the  careful  estimation  of  inputs  of  cash  budget,  there  are  two  more  ways  of  
dealing  with  the  uncertainty  of  the  cash  budget.  One  way  is  to  prepare  a  range  cash  budget  
based   on   three   types   of   forecasts   that   is   pessimistic,   most   likely,   and   optimistic.   The  
optimistic  to  pessimistic  range  of  cash  flows  makes  it  possible  for  the  financial  manager  to  
determine  the  amount  of  financing  required  to  cover  the  most  adverse  situation.  By  using  
the  several  cash  budgets,  based  on  differing  assumptions,  can  help  the  financial  manager  to  
develop  a  sense  of  understanding  of  the  riskiness  of  various  alternatives.  The  analysis  of  the  
riskiness   of   various   alternatives   is   known   as   the   sensitivity   analysis   and   is   often   used   to  
analyze   cash   flows   under   a   various   circumstances.   Various   software   packages   simplify   the  
process  of  actually  performing  sensitivity  analysis.  

Financial  Management     Page|  101    


 
 
Another  and  much  more  sophisticated  way  of  dealing  with  uncertainty  of  the  cash  budget  is  
simulation.  Simulation  of  the  occurrence  of  sales  and  other  uncertain  events,  a  probability  
distribution   of   ending   cash   flows   of   the   business   for   each   month   can   be   developed.   The  
financial  manager  can  use  the  developed  probability  distribution  in  order  to  determine  the  
amount  of  financing  needed  to  safeguard  the  firm  in  case  of  cash  shortage.  Further  detail  
about   the   sensitivity   analysis   and   the   simulation   is   beyond   the   scope   of   this   introductory  
course.  

SUMMARY  
To   estimate   short   term   cash   surpluses   and   shortages,   the   cash   planning   process   is   used.  
Cash  planning  process  rely  on  the  cash  budget  and  on  a  sales  forecast.  The  cash  budget  is  
commonly  prepared  for  a  one  year  period  and  it  is  further  divided  into  months.  It  includes  
cash   receipts   and   disbursements   for   each   period   to   estimate   net   cash   flow.   Adding  
beginning   cash   to   the   net   cash   flow   gives   the   estimate   the   ending   cash.   The   financial  
manager  can  determine  total  required  financing  by  subtracting  the  desired  minimum  cash  
balance   from   the   ending   cash   or   the   excess   cash   balance.   Either   sensitivity   analysis   or  
simulation  can  be  used  to  cope  with  uncertainty  in  the  cash  budget.    

Self-­‐Reflection  Questions  

1.   What   is   the   purpose   of   the   cash   budget?   What   role   does   the   sales   forecast   play  
in  the  preparation  of  a  cash  budget?  

2.  Describe  briefly  the  basic  format  of  the  cash  budget.  

3.  How  can  the  financial  manager  use  the  two  bottom  lines  of  the  cash  budget  to  
determine  the  short-­‐term  borrowing  and  investment  requirements  of  a  business?  

4.  What  is  the  major  cause  of  uncertainty  in  the  cash  budget,  and  what  techniques  
can  be  used  to  cope  with  this  uncertainty?  

   

Financial  Management     Page|  102    


 
 

TOPIC  4.3  PRO  FORMA  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS:  A  TOOL  FOR  PROFIT  PLANNING  
TOPIC  4.3  INTRODUCTION  
As   part   of   the   process   of   generating   positive   cash   flow,   the   financial   manager   uses   tools  
such   pro   forma   financial   statements.   This   tool   is   used   with   an   aim   to   carry   out   the  
responsibility   to   create   value   for   owners   of   the   business.   A   pro   forma   income   statement  
rely  on  past  percentage  relationships  between  certain  cost,  expense  items  and  the  sales  of  
the   business.   For   a   pro   forma   balance   sheet   values   of   some   accounts   are   estimated   and  
some  are  calculated  on  the  basis  of  their  relationship  to  sales.  Pro  forma  statements  aid  to  
achieve  short-­‐term  financial  goals  of  a  business  because  they  are  generally  used  to  forecast  
and  analyze  the  profitability  level  and  overall  financial  performance  of  the  business  so  that  
the  adjustments  can  be  made  to  planned  operations.  

TOPIC  4.3  OBJECTIVES  


Upon  completion  of  this  topic  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Explain   the   simplified   procedures   used   to   prepare   and   evaluate   the   pro   forma  
income  statement  and  the  pro  forma  balance  sheet.    
2. Identify   the   weaknesses   of   the   simplified   approaches   to   the   preparation   of   pro  
forma  financial  statement.  
3. Identify  the  common  uses  of  pro  forma  statements.    

PRO  FORMA  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  


In   cash   planning   process   the   focus   is   on   forecasting   cash   flows,   whereas,   the   focus   is   on  
accrual   concepts   in   profit   planning   process   to   estimate   the   profit   and   overall   financial  
position   of   the   business.   All   Stakeholders,   of   the   business   pay   close   attention   to   the   pro-­‐
forma   statements.   Pro-­‐forma   statements   are   the   projected,   or   forecasted,   income  
statements  and  balance  sheets.  There  are  various  approaches  for  estimating  the  pro  forma  
statements   which   are   based   on   the   belief   that   the   financial   relationships   reflected   in   the    
past   financial   statements   of   the   business   will   not   change   in   the   coming   period.   The   most  
common   and   simplified   approaches   of   preparing   the   pro-­‐forma   statements   are   presented  
in  this  text.  

Two  major  inputs  required  for  preparing  pro  forma  statements  are:  (1)  financial  statements  
of   the   business   for   the   preceding   year   and   (2)   the   sales   forecast   of   the   business   for   the  
coming  year.  A  variety  of  other  assumptions  must  also  be  made  for  preparing  the  pro-­‐forma  
statements.    

PRECEDING  YEAR’S  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  


The   business   we   will   use   to   illustrate   the   simplified   approaches   to   pro   forma   preparation   is  
XYZ   Manufacturing,   which   manufactures   and   sells   only   one   product.   The   income   statement  
for  the  business  operations  is  given  in  Table.  It  indicates  that  the  business  had  total  sales  of  
200,000,   total   cost   of   goods   sold   of   160,000,   profits   before   taxes   of   18,000,   and   after   taxes  
net  profits  of  15,300.  8,000  were  paid  in  cash  dividends,  leaving  7,300  to  be  transferred  to  
retained  earnings.  

The  following  is  the  balance  sheet  of  the  business  for  the  same  year.  

Financial  Management     Page|  103    


 
 

 
 

Financial  Management     Page|  104    


 
 

SALES  FORECAST  
Similar  to  the  cash  budget,  the  major  input  for  preparing  pro  forma  statements  is  the  sales  
forecast.   sales   forecast   developed   on   the   basis   of   internal   and   external   data   for   the   coming  
year   of   XYZ   Manufacturing,   is   presented   in   Table.     The   unit   sale   prices   of   the   products  
reflect   an   increase   from   40   to   50   This   increase   is   required   to   cover   the   anticipated   increase  
in  cost  of  the  product.    

PREPARING  THE  PRO  FORMA  STATEMENTS    


PRO  FORMA  INCOME  STATEMENT    
Percent   of   sales   method   is   a   simple   method   for   developing   the   pro   forma   income  
statement.  It  forecasts  the  sales  of  the  business  and  then  expresses  all  income  statement  
items   as   percentages   of   forecasted   sales.   By   using   dollar   values   available   in   XYZ  
manufacturing  2012  income  statement,  we  can  calculate  the  following  percentages:  

 
By  applying  these  calculated  percentages  to  the  forecasted  sales  of  the  XYZ  manufacturing  
(270,000)  we  can  prepare  the  pro  forma  income  statement  2013.  We  ignore  any  common  
stock  dividend  for  the  year  2013.The  pro  forma  income  stamen  is  shown  below.    

Financial  Management     Page|  105    


 
 

TYPES  OF  COSTS  AND  EXPENSE  CONSIDERATION    


The  pro  forma  income  statement  in  Table  is  prepared  under  assumption  that  all  the  costs  
and  expense  of  the  business  are  variable.  It  assumes  that  for  a  given  percentage  change  in  
the  sales  of  the  business  will  result  in  the  same  percentage  change  in  the  cost  of  goods  sold,  
operating   expenses   and   interest   expense.     The   assumption   would   result   in   the   same  
percentage   change   in   the   Net   profit   of   the   business.   We   know   that   the   fixed   costs   of   the  
business   do   not   change   when   sales   increase   but   the   result   of   increased   sales   is   the  
increased  profit  and  vice  versa.  This  approach  of  preparing  the  pro  forma  income  statement  
implies  that  the  business  will  not  be  able  to  utilize  benefits  of  fixed  costs    that  result  from  
increased  sales.    

The   best   approach   to   deal   with   this   to   identify   the     fixed   and   variable   elements   in   the  
historical   cost   of   the   business.   In   table,   a   new   pro   forma   income   statement   has   been  
developed   by   taking   into   account   the   fixed   and   variable   elements   of   the   costs   of   the   XYZ  
Manufacturing.  

PRO  FORMA  BALANCE  SHEET    


The   simple   approach   to   prepare   the   pro   forma   balance   sheet   is   judgmental   approach.    
Under   this   method   the   values   of   some   specific   balance   sheet   accounts   are   estimated   and  
the   external   financing   of   the   business   is   used   as   a   balancing   figure   for   balancing   the  
Performa  balance  sheet.  To  apply  the  judgmental  approach  to  prepare  pro  forma  balance  
sheet   of   XYZ   Manufacturing   for   the   year   2013,   a   number   of   assumptions   are   required   to   be  
made  about  a  number  of    balance  sheet  accounts.  These  assumptions  are  as  follows:  

Financial  Management     Page|  106    


 
 

 
A   pro   forma   balance   sheet   for   XYZ   manufacturing   for   the   year   2013   is   presented   in   the  
table.  The  external  financing  of  16,586  is  required  to  balance  the  pro  forma  balance  sheet.  
Requirement  of  external  financing  means  that  the  business  will  have  to  acquire  these  funds  
in  order  to  support  the  increased  level  of  sales  for  coming  year.    

Financial  Management     Page|  107    


 
 

 
 

A   positive   value   of   required   external   financing   means   that   the   business   must   raise   funds  
externally   using   any   form   of   financing   e.g.   debt   and/or   equity   financing   or   by   reducing  
dividends   in   case   of   public   limited   company.   The   form   of   financing   is   then   decided   and  
eventually,  the  pro  forma  balance  sheet  is  modified  to  replace  “required  external  financing”  
with  the  planned  increases  in  the  debt  and/or  equity  accounts.    

On   the   other   hand,   a   negative   value   for   “required   external   financing”   indicates   that   the  
forecasted   financing   of   the   business   is   in   excess   of   its   requirement.   In   this   case,   available  
funds   are   used   in   repayment   of   debt,   repurchasing   stock   or   increasing   dividends   (in   case   of  
public   limited  company).  “Required  external  financing”  is  replaced  in  the  pro  forma  balance  
sheet  of  the  business  with  the  planned  reductions  in  the  debt  and/or  equity  accounts,  once  
the  business  determines  the  specific  action.  This  implies  that  the  judgmental  approach  can  
not  only  be  used  to  prepare  the  pro  forma  balance  sheet  but  also  can  be  frequently  used  
specifically  to  estimate  the  financing  requirements  of  the  business.  

Financial  Management     Page|  108    


 
 

EVALUATING  THE  PRO  FORMA  STATEMENTS  


It   is   not   easy   to   forecast   the   several   variables   involved   in   preparation   of   pro   forma  
statements.  As  a  result,  stakeholders,  that  is  -­‐  investors,  lenders  and  managers  frequently  
use   the   techniques   discussed   above   to   make   rough   estimates   and   prepare   the   pro   forma  
financial   statements.   However,   it   is   essential   to   be   familiar   with   the   basic   weaknesses   of  
these   simple   approaches.   The   two   assumptions   to   prepare   the   pro   forma   statements   are  
responsible  for  the  weakness.  First  assumption  is  that  the  firm’s  past  financial  condition  is  
an  accurate  indicator  of  its  future,  which  is  not  always  the  case,  and  the  second  assumption  
that   some   variables   such   as   cash   balance,   accounts   receivable   and   inventories   can   be  
forced  to  take  on  desired  values.  One  cannot  justify  these  assumptions  solely  on  the  basis  
of   simplicity   involved   in   calculations.   However,   the   simplified   approaches   to   pro   forma  
statement   preparations   are   expected   to   remain   popular   ,   regardless   of   their   weaknesses,  
because   of   their   simplicity.   Sooner   or   later,   the   use   of   computer   programmes   to   streamline  
financial   planning   will   become   the   standard.   Regardless   of   the   technique   used   to   prepare  
pro  forma  statements,  the  analysts  must  have  understanding  on  how  to  use   them  to  make  
financial   decisions.   Pro   forma   statements   can   be   used   by   both   financial   managers   and  
lenders   to   analyze   the   cash   inflows   and   outflows   of   the   business,   as   well   as   the   liquidity,  
activity,   level   of   debt,   profitability,   and   market   value   of   the   business.   A   variety   of   ratios   can  
be   calculated   from   the   pro   forma   financial   statements(income   statement   and   balance  
sheet)   to   evaluate   performance   of   the   business.   Inflows   and   outflows   of   cash   can   also   be  
evaluated  by  preparing  a  pro  forma  statement  of  cash  flows.  After  analyzing  the  pro  forma  
financial   statements,   the   financial   manager   can   adjust   planned   operations   by   taking  
effective  steps  to  achieve  short  term  financial  goals.  For  example,  if  anticipated  profits  on  
the   pro   forma   income   statement   are   very   low,   various   pricing   and/or   cost-­‐cutting   actions  
might  be  initiated.  If  the  anticipated  level  of  accounts  receivable  on  the  pro  forma  balance  
sheet   is   very   high,   changes   in   credit   or   collection   policy   may   be   desired.   Therefore,   pro-­‐
forma  statements  play  an  important  role  in  solidifying  the    financial  plans  of  the  business  
for  the  future.  

TOPIC  4.  SUMMARY  


A   pro-­‐forma   income   statement   can   be   developed   by   calculating   past   percentage  
relationships  between  the    sales  of  a    business  and  certain  cost  and  expense  items.  These  
percentages  are  then  applied  to  forecasts.  This  approach  tends  to  understate  profits  when  
sales   are   increasing   and   to   overstate   profits   when   sales   are   decreasing   because   this  
approach   implies   that   all   costs   and   expenses   are   variable.   By   breaking   down   costs   and  
expenses   into   fixed   and   variable   components,   it   is   possible   to   avoid   this   problem.   This   way,  
the   fixed   components   remain   unchanged   from   the   most   recent   year,   and   the   variable   costs  
and  expenses  are  forecast  on  a  percent  of  sales  basis.  

For  preparing  pro  forma  Balance  sheet  using  the  judgmental  approach,  the  values  of  certain  
accounts   are   estimated   and   others   are   calculated,   commonly   on   the   basis   of   their  
relationship   to   sales.   The   external   financing   of   a   business   is   used   as   a   balancing   figure.   A  
positive  figure  of  ‘external  financing  required’  indicates  that  the  business  must  raise  funds  
externally   or   reduce   dividends   in   case   of   public   limited   firms.   Whereas,   a   negative   figure  
means   that   funds   are   available   for   use   in   repaying   debt,   repurchasing   stock   or   increasing  
dividends.  

Financial  Management     Page|  109    


 
 
Although  popular  approaches  used  for  preparing  pro-­‐forma  statements  can  be  criticized  but  
simple   approaches   are   more   criticized   because   they   rely   on   the   assumption   that   the   past  
financial   condition   of   a   business   is   an   accurate   indicator   of   the   future   and   that   certain  
variables   can   be   forced   to   take   on   certain   desired   values.   Pro   forma   statements   are  
commonly   used   to   forecast   and   analyze   the   level   of   profitability   and   overall   financial  
performance  of  a  business  in  order  to  make  adjustments  in  planned  operations  to  achieve  
short-­‐term  financial  goals.  

Self-­‐Reflection  Questions  

1.  What  are  the  two  major  weaknesses  of  the  simplified  approaches  to  preparing  
pro  forma  statements?  

2.  What  is  the  objective  of  financial  manager    in  evaluating  pro  forma  statements?  

UNIT  4  –  REFERENCES  
Brealey,   R.A;   Myers,   S.C;   Allen,   F.(2006)   Principles   of   corporate   finance,   6th   ed.    
dandelon.com  

Gitman,   Lawrence   J.   And   Chad   J.   Zutter   (2012)   Principles   of   managerial   finance,   13th   ed.     p.  
cm.  The  Prentice  Hall    

Gitman,  Lawrence  J.  (2002)  Principles  of  managerial  finance,  10th  ed.    p.  cm.  The  Prentice  
Hall    

UNIT  4  –  SUMMARY  
ASSIGNMENTS  AND  ACTIVITIES  
The  assignment  and  activities  covered  in  the  unit  four  will  enable  the  students  to  practice  
the   learned   techniques   of   financial   planning.     The   following   is   a   general   guide   to   the  
participating  institutions  on  the  type  of  assignments  .  
 
A  financial  analyst  for  a  Company,  has  prepared  the  following  sales  and  cash  disbursement  
estimates  for  the  period  January–May  of  the  current  year.  

Month   Sales   Cash  disbursements  


  000   000  
January   500   400  
February   600   300  
March   400   600  
April   200   500  
May     200   200  
The  financial  analyst  notes  that  historically,  30%  of  sales  have  been  for  cash.  Of  credit  sales,  
70%   are   collected   1   month   after   the   sale,   and   the   remaining   30%   are   collected   2   months  

Financial  Management     Page|  110    


 
 
after   the   sale.   The   business   wishes   to   maintain   a   minimum   ending   balance   in   its   cash  
account   of   25000.   Balances   above   this   amount   would   be   invested   in   short-­‐term  
government   securities,   whereas   any   deficits   would   be   financed   through   short-­‐term   bank  
borrowing.  The  beginning  cash  balance  at  March  1  is  115000.  

The   business   expects   sales   during   2013   to   rise   from   the   2012   level   of   3.5   million   to   3.9  
million.  The  interest  expense  in  2013  is  expected  to  drop  to  325,000  because  of  a  scheduled  
large   loan   payment.   The   business   firm   expects   to   increase   its   cash   dividend   payments  
during  2013  to  320,000.  The  year-­‐end  2012  income  statement  of  the  business  is  as  follows.  

Income  Statement  
for  the  Year  Ended  December  31,  2012  
Sales  revenue     3,500,000  
Less:  Cost  of  goods  sold   1925000  
Gross  profits     1,575,000  
Less:  Operating  expenses   420,000  
Operating  profits     1,155,000  
Less:  Interest  expense   400,000  
Net  profits  before  taxes      755,000  
Less:  Taxes  (40%)   302,000  
Net  profits  after  taxes      453,000  
Less:  Cash  dividends   250,000  
To  retained  earnings     203,000  
 

i.  Prepare  a  cash  budget  for  March,  April,  and  May.  

ii.   How   much   financing,   if   any,   at   a   maximum   would   Carroll   Company   require   to   meet   its  
obligations  during  this  3-­‐month  period?  

iii.   A   pro-­‐forma   balance   sheet   dated   at   the   end   of   June   is   to   be   prepared   from   the  
information   presented.   Give   the   size   of   each   of   the   following:   cash,   notes   payable,  
marketable  securities,  and  accounts  receivable.  

iv.   Use   the   percent-­‐of-­‐sales   method   to   prepare   a   2013   pro-­‐forma   income   statement   for   the  
business.    

v.   Explain   why   the   statement   may   underestimate   the   company’s   actual   2013   pro   forma  
income.  

SUMMARY  
The  unit  covers  the  importance  of  financial  planning  process.  Financial  planning  process  is  
very  important  because  it  acts  as  the  starting  point  for  guiding,  coordinating  and  controlling  
the  actions  of  the  business  to  achieve  their  desired  goals.    A  business  is  required  to  develop  
strategic   financial   plans   as   the   starting   point   of   the   financial   planning   process.   The   strategic  
plans   leads   to   the   formulation   of   operating,   plans   and   budgets.   Commonly,   the   operational  

Financial  Management     Page|  111    


 
 
plans  and  budgets  implement  the    strategic  goals  of  a  business.  The  unit  explains  in  detail  
the  two  major  aspects  of  the  financial  planning  process  which  are  cash  planning  and  profit  
planning.   Cash   planning   includes   preparation   of   the   cash   budget   and   profit   planning  
involves   preparation   of   pro-­‐forma   financial   statements.   The   cash   budget   and   the   pro   forma    
financial   statements   are   an   aid   for   internal   financial   planning   and   they   are   routinely  
required  by  present  and  future  creditors.    

NEXT  STEPS  
 The   unit   comprehensively   covered   the   important   techniques   used   in   financial   planning  
process.  Therefore,  the    next  unit  will  discuss  short    term  funds  management  .  

   

Financial  Management     Page|  112    


 
 

UNIT  FIVE  -­‐  SHORT  TERM  FUNDS  MANAGEMENT  

UNIT  5  INTRODUCTION  
Important   components   of   financial   structure   of   a   business   are   the   level   of   investment   in   its  
current  assets  and  the  extent  of  its  financing  using  current  liabilities.  The  short  term  funds  
management  is  the  management  of  current  assets  and  current  liabilities  and  it  is  the  most  
important   activity   of   a   business.   The   financial   manger   of   the   business   needs   to   give   his  
effort   and   time   to   this   activity.   The   current   assets   of   a   business   include   inventory,   accounts  
receivables  cash  and  marketable  securities  whereas,  the  current  liabilities  include  accounts  
payable,   accruals   and   notes   payable.   The   goal   of   short   term   funds   management   is   to  
manage  the  current  assets  and  current  liabilities  to  achieve  a  balance  between  profitability  
and  risk  that  contributes  positively  to  the  value  of  the  business.    

UNIT  5  OBJECTIVES  
Upon  completion  of  this  unit  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Understand  short-­‐term  funds  management,  net  working  capital  and  the  related  
trade-­‐off  between  profitability  and  risk  of  a  business.  
2. Discuss  different  inventory  management  views  and  the    common  techniques  of  
inventory  management.  
3. Identify  the  major  components  of  credit  terms  that  a  business  follows  and  the  
procedures  for  analysing  them.  
4. Understand  the  effects  of  stretching  accounts  payable  on  their  cost  and  the  use  of  
accruals.  
5. Describe  the  interest  rates  ,  basic  types  of  unsecured  bank  sources  of  short  term  
loans  and  basic  features  of  commercial  paper.    
6. Explain  the  characteristics  of  secured  short  term  loans,  use  of  accounts  receivables  
and  inventory    as  short  term  loan  collateral.    

UNIT  5  READINGS  
To    complete  this  unit,  you  are  required  to  read  the  following  chapters:  

Gitman  et  al.  (2012  or  2002),    chapter  3  

Baker, et al.  (2009), Chapter 6  

UNIT  5  ASSIGNMENTS  AND  ACTIVITIES  


 Thorough  out  the  unit,  self  reflection  questions    specific  to  each  topic  are  provided  at  the  
end  of  each  topic.  A  comprehensive  assignment  for  the  unit    will  be  designed  by  the  
instructor.  

Financial  Management     Page|  113    


 
 

TOPIC  5.1  –  WORKING  CAPITAL  MANAGEMENT    


TOPIC  5.1  INTRODUCTION  
Working capital management is a strategy that focus on maintaining efficient
levels of both components (current assets and current liabilities) of working
capital. It ensures that a business has sufficient cash flow in order to meet its
operating expenses and short-term obligations as they become due. An effective
working capital management system helps a business to improve its earnings.

TOPIC    5.1  OBJECTIVES  


Upon  completion  of  this  topic  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Understand  the  short-­‐term  funds  management.  


2. Understand  the  concept  of  net  working  capital  and  the  related  trade-­‐off  between  
profitability  and  risk  of  a  business.  
3. Describe  the  cash  conversion  cycle  and  its  funding  requirements.    

WORKING  CAPITAL  AND  NET  WORKING  CAPITAL  


Current   assets   representing   the   portion   of   investment   that   circulates   from   one   form   to  
another  in  the  ordinary  course  of  business  is  referred  to  as  working  capital.  In  simple  words,  
working  capital  is  the  total  current  assets  of  a  business.  Whereas,  the  difference  between  
the   current   assets   and   the   current   liabilities   of   a   business   are   referred   to   as   net   working  
capital.  The  value  of  the  net  working  capital  can  be  positive  or  negative.  It  is  positive  if  the  
current  assets  of  a  business  are  greater  than  the  current  liabilities  and  it  is  negative  if  the  
current   liabilities   of   a   business   are   greater   than   the   current   assets.   In   equation   form   net  
working  capital  is  represented  as:  

Net  working  capital  =  Current  assets  –  Current  liabilities  

Working   capital   measures   how   much   in   liquid   assets   a   company   has   available   to   build   its  
business.   The   number   can   be   positive   or   negative,   depending   on   how   much   debt   the  
company  is  carrying.  In  general,  companies  that  have  a  lot  of  working  capital  will  be  more  
successful   since   they   can   expand   and   improve   their   operations.   Businesses   with   negative  
working  capital  may  lack  the  funds  necessary  for  growth.  

While   this   definition   of   working   capital   encompasses   certain   assets   and   liabilities   that   are  
expected  to  be  consumed,  converted  into  cash,  or  settled  in  cash  within  the  next  year  (e.g.  
such  as  prepaid  expenses  and  accrued  liabilities)  the  typical  components  of  working  capital  
that  are  aggressively  managed  include:  

• Cash  
• Accounts  Receivable  
• Inventory  
• Accounts  Payable  

Financial  Management     Page|  114    


 
 
• Short-­‐term  debt  

Recurring  business  activities  make  a  cycle  on  either  generating  or  consuming  working  
capital.  Taking  a  look  at  a  manufacturing  organization,  the  following  inter-­‐related  and  
concurring  “cycles”  generate  and  consume  working  capital:  Inventory  (in  raw  material  
form)  is  purchased  from  suppliers  on  short-­‐term  (trade)  credit,  creating  Accounts  Payable  
(Procure-­‐to-­‐Pay  Cycle)  as  given  in(www.mhhe.com/rwj.)  

• Inventory  is  converted  from  raw  materials  into  finished  goods  (Inventory  Cycle)  
• Inventory  (in  finished  goods  form)  is  sold  to  customers  on  short-­‐term  (trade)  
credit,  creating  Accounts  Receivable  (Order-­‐to-­‐Cash  Cycle)  
• Suppliers  are  paid  in  cash,  reducing  Accounts  Payable  and  reducing  Cash  (Procure-­‐
to-­‐Pay  Cycle)  
• Customers  remit  payment,  reducing  Accounts  Receivable  and  increasing  Cash  
(Order-­‐to-­‐Cash  Cycle)  

THE  GOALS  OF  WORKING  CAPITAL  MANAGEMENT  


In   principle   Working   Capital   Management   ensures   that   an   organization   generates   sufficient  
positive  working  capital  (specifically  in  the  form  of  Cash)  from  ongoing  business  activities  to  
continually   fund   both   debt   payments   and   operating   expenses.   It   therefore   means   it  
consistently  controls  the  processes  (cycles)  occurring  within  the  organisation.  

Because  the  processes  within  working  capital  are  interrelated,  decisions  made  within  each  
one   of   the   disciplines   can   impact   the   other   processes,   and   ultimately   affect   an  
organization’s  overall  financial  performance.  It  therefore  follows  that  making  a  decision  will  
need  on  to  take  the  holistic  picture  of  working  capital.  One  of  the  most  important  decisions  
involve  cash  holding;  how  much  cash  to  keep  and  why?  

CASH  AND  M OTIVES  FOR  HOLDING  CASH  


Managing  cash  is  becoming  ever  more  sophisticated  in  the  global  and  electronic  age  of  the  
new  century  as  financial  managers  try  to  squeeze  the  last  dollar  of  profit  out  of  their  cash  
management   strategies.   Despite   whatever   lifelong   teachings   you   might   have   learned   about  
the  virtues  of  cash,  the  corporate  financial  manager  actively  seeks  to  keep  this  nonearning  
asset  to  a  minimum.  The  less  cash  you  have,  generally  the  better  off  you  are,  but  still  you  
do  not  want  to  get  caught  without  cash  when  you  need  it.  Minimizing  cash  balances  as  well  
as   having   accurate   knowledge   of   when   cash   moves   into   and   out   of   the   company   can  
improve   overall   corporate   profitability.   First   we   discuss   the   reasons   for   holding   cash   and  
then  examine  the  cash  flow  cycle  for  the  typical  firm.  

REASONS  FOR  HOLDING  CASH  BALANCES  


There   are   several   reasons   for   holding   cash:   for   transactions   balances,   for   compensating  
balances  for  banks,  and  for  precautionary  needs.  The  transactions  motive  involves  the  use  
of  cash  to  pay  for  planned  corporate  expenses  such  as  supplies,  payrolls,  and  taxes,  but  also  

Financial  Management     Page|  115    


 
 
can   include   planned   acquisitions   of   long-­‐term   fixed   assets.   The   second   major   reason   for  
holding   cash   results   from   the   practice   of   holding   balances   to   compensate   a   bank   for  
services  provided  rather  than  paying  directly  for  those  services.  

Holding   cash   for   precautionary   motives   assumes   management   wants   cash   for   emergency  
purposes  when  cash  inflows  are  less  than  projected.  Precautionary  cash  balances  are  more  
likely   to   be   important   in   seasonal   or   cyclical   industries   where   cash   inflows   are   more  
uncertain.  Firms  with  precautionary  needs  usually  rely  on  untapped  lines  of  bank  credit.  For  
most  firms  the  primary  motive  for  holding  cash  is  the  transactions  motive.  

CASH  FLOW  CYCLE  


Cash   balances   are   largely   determined   by   cash   flowing   through   the   company   on   a   daily,  
weekly,   and   monthly   basis   as   determined   by   the   cash   flow   cycle.   As   discussed   in   unit   4,   the  
cash   budget   is   a   common   tool   used   to   track   cash   flows   and   resulting   cash   balances.   Cash  
flow  relies  on  the  payment  pattern  of  customers,  the  speed  at  which  suppliers  and  creditors  
process   checks,   and   the   efficiency   of   the   banking   system.   The   primary   consideration   in  
managing   the   cash   flow   cycle   is   to   ensure   that   inflows   and   outflows   of   cash   are   properly  
synchronized  for  transaction  purposes.    

THE  CASH  CONVERSION  CYCLE    


Understanding  of  cash  conversion  cycle  of  a  business  is  the  important  aspect  of  short  term  
financial   management.   We   begin   our   discussion   by   representing   the   calculation   of   cash  
conversion  cycle  and  its  application.    

Operating  cycle  of  a  business  is  the  total  time  from  beginning  of  the  production  process  of  a  
product  to  collection  of  cash  from  the  sale  of  the  finished  product.    The  operating  cycle  of  a  
business  includes  inventory  and  accounts  receivables    (short  term  assets).  Operating  cycle  
can  be  measured  as:  

OC = AAI + ACP    

Where,  

OC  =  Operating  cycle  

AAI  =  Average  age  of  inventory    

ACP  =  Average  collection  period  

Additionally,   the   purchase   of   production   inputs   on   account   are   also   included   in   the   process  
of   producing   and   selling   a   product.   The   purchase   of   production   inputs   on   account   results   in  
accounts  payable  and  accounts  payable  reduce  the  number  of  days  resources  are  tied  up  in  
operating   cycle   of   a   business.   The   time   a   business   takes   to   pay   its   accounts   payable   is  
known  as  the  average  payment  period  (APP).  Therefore,  the  cash  conversion  cycle(CCC)  is  
represented  as:  

Financial  Management     Page|  116    


 
 
CCC = OC − APP  

Or    

CCC = AAI + ACP − APP  

It   is   clear   that   a   business   can   make   changes   in   the   amount   of   resources   tied   up   in   the  
routine  operation  of  the  business  by  making  changes  in  any  of  the  mentioned  time  periods  
(ACP  and  APP).  

Example  –Cash  conversion  cycle    

Rex  Limited   has  annual   sales   of   20   million,   a   cost   of   goods   sold   of   75%   of   sales   and  its  
purchases   are   65%   of   its   cost   of   goods   sold.   Rex   Limited’s   average   age   of   inventory  
(AAI),   average   collection   period   (ACP)   and   average   payment   period   (APP)   are   60,   40  
and  35  days  respectively.  Therefore  the  cash  conversion  cycle  of  the  Rex  limited  is  65  
days  (60  =  40  –  35).  The  total  invested  resources  in  the  cash  conversion  cycle  include  
inventory,  accounts  receivable  and  accounts  payable.    

60
𝐼𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑦 = (20,000,000  ×0.75)× ! ! = 2,500,000  
360
40
𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑡𝑠  𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑣𝑖𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 = !20,000,000  × ! = 2,222,222  
360
35
𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑡𝑠  𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑣𝑖𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 = (20,000,000  ×0.75  ×0.65)×( ) = 944,016  
360
Therefore,  total  invested  resources  are  equal  to  3,774,306.  Any  changes  in  any  of  the  
time   periods   will   change   the   resources   tied   up   in   operations   of   the   business.   For  
instance,  if  Rex  limited  could  reduce  the  ACP  by  5  days,  the  cash  conversion  time  will  
be   shortened   and   the   tied   up   resources   will   be   reduced   by   277,778.   [20,000,000   ×  
(5/360)].  
 

CASH  CONVERSION  CYCLE’S  FUNDING  REQUIREMENTS    


Cash   conversion   cycle   is   the   basis   a   business   uses   for   funding   its   investment   in   operating  
assets.    

PERMANENT  VERSUS  SEASONAL  FUNDING  NEEDS  


There   are   two   different   types   of   funding   needs   that   is   permanent   funding   needs   and  
seasonal   funding   needs.   If   the   sales   of   a   business   are   constant   then   its   investment   in   the  
operating  assets  will  remain  constant    and  it  will  have  permanent  funding  requirements.  On  
the  other  hand,  if  the  sales  of  a  business  are  cyclic  then  its  investment  in  operating  assets  
will  vary  with  its  cycle  of  sales.  Cyclic  needs  of  funding  are  referred  to  as  seasonal  funding  
requirements.      

Financial  Management     Page|  117    


 
 

AGGRESSIVE  VERSUS  CONSERVATIVE  FUNDING  STRATEGY  


Short  term  are  less  expensive  than  long  term  funds  but  with  regard  to  changes  in    interest  
rates  long  term  funds  are  less  risky  than  short  term.  Long  term  funds  ensure  the  availability  
of   the   funds   as   and   when   they   are   needed.   In   case   a   business   rely   on   short   term   funds,   the  
business  is  exposed  to  the  risk  of  non  availability  of  funds  when  they  are  needed  to  cover  
the   seasonal   peaks.   A   business   can   chose   from   either   an   aggressive   funding   strategy   or   a  
conservative  funding  strategy  to  meet  the  requirements  of  funds  for  investing  in  operating  
assets.   An   aggressive   funding   strategy   helps   the   business   to   meet   its   seasonal   funding  
requirements   using   short   term   financing   and   its   permanent   funding   requirements   using  
long  term  financing.  Alternatively,  a  conservative  funding  strategy  enables  a  business  to  use  
long  term  financing  option  to  meet  its  seasonal  and  permanent    requirements  of  funds.    

It  is  clear  that  the  aggressive  funding  strategy  relies  heavily  on  the  short  term  financing.  It  is  
more   risky   than   the   conservative   funding   strategy   because   of   the   changes   in   the   interest  
rates  and  potential  difficulties  in  quickly  obtaining    these  funds  during  the  seasonal  peaks.  
The   conservative   strategy   minimizes   these   risks     because   of   locked   in   interest   rates   and   the  
long   term   availability   of   funds.   It   is   more   costly   than   the   aggressive   funding   strategy   due   to  
the  negative  spread  between  the  surplus  funds  earning  rate  and  the  cost  of  long  term  funds  
that  create  the  surplus.  The  decision  whether  to  adopt  aggressive  or  conservative  strategy  
is  dependent  on  the  disposition  of  management  towards  risk  and  the  strength  of  its  banking  
relationships.    

TOPIC  5.1  SUMMARY  


Working  capital  represents  the  operating  liquidity  available  to  a  business.  It  is  considered  as  
a   part   of   operating   capital,   along   with   fixed   assets   such   as   plant   and   equipment.   Net  
working   capital   is   a   derivation   of   working   capital   that   is   commonly   used   in   valuation  
techniques.   If   current   assets   are   less   than   current   liabilities   a   business  has   a  working   capital  
deficiency   and   is   called   a  working   capital   deficit.   Working capital management is a
strategy that focus on maintaining optimal levels of current assets and current
liabilities.

Financial  Management     Page|  118    


 
 

Self-­‐Reflection  Questions    

1.  What  is  the  working  capital  management?  Highlight  the  difference  between  
working  capital  and  net  working  capital.  

2.  Briefly  describe  the  reasons  for  holding  cash  and  how  does  the  cash  flow  cycle  
works?    

3.  what  is  difference  between  the  operating  cycle  and  the  cash  conversion  cycle  of  
a  business  and  why  it  is  important  to  minimize  the  length  of  a  cash  conversion  
cycle.  4.  highlight  the  benefits  and  costs  of  an  aggressive  and  a  conservative  
funding  strategy.    

   

Financial  Management     Page|  119    


 
 

TOPIC  5.2  –  INVENTORY  MANAGEMENT  


TOPIC  5.2  INTRODUCTION  
All  forms  of  inventory  need  to  be  financed,  and  the  efficient  management  of  inventory  can  
increase   profitability   a   business.   It   is   not   always   possible   for   a   business   to   control   the  
amount   of   inventory   because   it   is   regularly   affected   by   sales,   production   and   economic  
conditions  of  a  any  business.  Inventory  management  techniques  help  managers  to  achieve  
business  objectives  efficiently.    

TOPIC  5.2  OBJECTIVES  


Upon  completion  of  this  topic  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Identify  different  inventory  management  views    


2. Develop  an  understanding  of  the    common  techniques  of  inventory  management.  

INVENTORY:  AN  OVERVIEW  


In   a   manufacturing   company,   inventory   is   usually   divided   into   the   three   basic   categories:  
raw   materials   used   in   the   product;   work   in   progress   which   reflects   partially   finished  
products  and  finished  goods,  which  are  ready  for  sale.  All  these  forms  of  inventory  need  to  
be  financed  and  their  efficient  management  can  increase  a  firm’s  profitability.  The  amount  
of  inventory  is  not  always  totally  controlled  by  company  management  because  it  is  affected  
by  sales,  production,  and  economic  conditions.  

Because  of  its  cyclical  sales  that  are  highly  sensitive  to  the  economic  business  climate,  the  
automobile  industry  is  a  good  case  study  in  inventory  management.  The  automakers  have  
often  suffered  from  inventory  build-­‐ups  when  sales  declined  because  adjusting  production  
levels   required   time.   During   the   1980s,   again   in   2002–03,   2005   and   2007,   the   big   three  
(General   Motors,   Ford,   and   Chrysler)   took   turns   implementing   buyer   incentive   programs  
such   as   discount   financing   at   rates   well   below   market   rates   and   cash   rebate   programs   to  
stimulate   sales.   These   programs   cut   profit   margins   per   vehicle   but   generated   cash   flow   and  
reduced  investment  expenses  associated  with  holding  high  inventories.  Because  inventory  
is   the   least   liquid   of   current   assets,   it   should   provide   the   highest   yield   to   justify   the  
investment.   While   the   financial   manager   may   have   direct   control   over   cash   management,  
marketable   securities,   and   accounts   receivable,   control   over   inventory   policy   is   generally  
shared   with   production   management   and   marketing.   Let   us   examine   some   key   factors  
influencing  inventory  management.  

LEVEL  VERSUS  SEASONAL  PRODUCTION  


A   manufacturing   firm   must   determine   whether   a   plan   of   level   or   seasonal   production  
should  be  followed.  While  level  (even)  production  throughout  the  year  allows  for  maximum  
efficiency   in   the   use   of   manpower   rand   machinery,   it   may   result   in   unnecessarily   high  
inventory   build-­‐ups   before   shipment,   particularly   in   a   seasonal   business.   For   example,   a  
bathing  suit  manufacturer  would  not  want  excess  suits  in  stock  in  November.  If  we  produce  

Financial  Management     Page|  120    


 
 
on   a   seasonal   basis,   the   inventory   problem   is   eliminated,   but   we   will   then   have   unused  
capacity   during   slack   periods.   Furthermore,   as   we   shift   to   maximum   operations   to   meet  
seasonal   needs,   we   may   be   forced   to   pay   overtime   wages   to   labour   and   to   sustain   other  
inefficiencies  as  equipment  is  overused.  We  have  a  classic  problem  in  financial  analysis.  Are  
the  cost  savings  from  level  production  sufficient  to  justify  the  extra  expenditure  in  carrying  
inventory?  A  few  common  inventory  management  techniques  are  discussed  below.  

ABC  INVENTORY  SYSTEM    


ABC  inventory  system  sorts  the  total  inventory  of  a  business  into  three  groups  A,  B  and  C.  
The  group  A  includes  all  those  items  which  have  the  largest  dollar  investment.  Similarly,  the  
group   B   includes   all   those   items   which   have   the   next   largest   dollar   investment   and   the  
group  C  includes  items  with  small  dollar  investments.  The  ABC  inventory  system  is  used  in  
order  to  focus  on  the  most  important  items  in  inventory.  Usually  a  relatively  few  items  will  
account   for   a   very   significant   value.   These   relatively   few   items   with   great   importance   are  
categorized  as  the  "A"  items.  It  is  also  common  for  many  of  the  items  in  inventory  to  have  a  
relatively   small   aggregate   value.   These   items   are   categorized   as   "C"   items.   The   remaining  
items  are  categorized  as  the  "B"  items.  By  closely  monitoring  the  "A"  items,  a  company  is  
able  to  manage  the  most  important  items  with  a  relatively  small  effort.  

The  ABC  inventory  system  helps  in  managing  the  inventory  by  sorting  it  into  three  groups  or  
bins  and  when  a  bin  is  nearly  empty  or  empty  ,  an  order  is  placed  to  fill  the  bin.  The  large  
dollar   investment   in   group   A   and   B   items   requires   a   more   sophisticated   inventory  
management  approach  which  is  economic  order  quantity  and  is  discussed  next.      

ECONOMIC  ORDERING  QUANTITY  


Substantial   research   has   been   devoted   to   determining   optimum   inventory   size,   order  
quantity,  usage  rate,  and  similar  considerations.  An  entire  branch  in  the  field  of  operations  
research  is  dedicated  to  the  subject.  In  developing  an  inventory  model,  we  must  evaluate  
the   two   basic   costs   associated   with   inventory:   the   carrying   costs   and   the   ordering   costs.  
Through   a   careful   analysis   of   both   of   these   variables,   we   can   determine   the   optimum   order  
size  that  minimizes  costs.  

CARRYING  COSTS  
 Carrying   costs   include   interest   on   funds   tied   up   in   inventory   and   the   costs   of   warehouse  
space,  insurance  premiums,  and  material  handling  expenses.  There  is  also  an  implicit  cost  
associated   with   the   dangers   of   obsolescence   or   perishability   and   rapid   price   change.   The  
larger   the   order   we   place,   the   greater   the   average   inventory   we   will   have   on   hand,   and   the  
higher  the  carrying  costs.  Ordering  Costs  As  a  second  factor,  we  must  consider  the  cost  of  
ordering   and   processing   inventory   into   stock.   If   we   maintain   a   relatively   low   average  
inventory   in   stock,   we   must   order   many   times   and   total   ordering   costs   will   be   high.   The  
opposite   patterns   associated   with   the   two   costs   are   portrayed   in   Figure   7–8   on   the   next  
page.  

Financial  Management     Page|  121    


 
 

ORDERING  COSTS    

As   the   order   size   increases,   carrying   costs   go   up   because   we   have   more   inventory   on   hand.  
With  larger  orders,  of  course,  we  will  order  less  frequently  and  overall  ordering  costs  will  go  
down.  The  trade-­‐off  between  the  two  can  best  be  judged  by  examining  the  total  cost  curve.  
At  point  M  on  that  curve,  we  have  appropriately  played  the  advantages  and  disadvantages  
of   the   respective   costs   against   each   other.   With   larger   orders,   carrying   costs   will   be  
excessive,  while  at  a  reduced  order  size,  constant  ordering  will  put  us  at  an  undesirably  high  
point  on  the  ordering  cost  curve.  

As   a   second   factor,   we   must   consider   the   cost   of   ordering   and   processing   inventory   into  
stock.  If  we  maintain  a  relatively  low  average  inventory  in  stock,    we  must  order  many  times  
and  total  ordering  costs  will  be  high.  The  opposite  patterns  associated  with  the  two  costs  
are  portrayed  in  Figure.  

As  the  order  size  increases,  carrying  costs  go  up  because  we  have  more  inventory  on    hand.  
With  larger  orders,  of  course,  we  will  order  less  frequently  and  overall  ordering  costs  will  go  
down.  The  trade-­‐off  between  the  two  can  best  be  judged  by  examining  the  total  cost  curve.  
At  point  M  on  that  curve,  we  have  appropriately  played  the  advantages  and  disadvantages  
of   the   respective   costs   against   each   other.   With   larger   orders,   carrying   costs   will   be  
excessive,  while  at  a  reduced  order  size,  constant  ordering  will  put  us  at  an  undesirably  high  
point  on  the  ordering  cost  curve.  

Financial  Management     Page|  122    


 
 

DERIVING  ECONOMIC  ORDERING  QUANTITY  FORMULA  


Economic   order   quantity   model   is   the     most   common   technique   used   to   determine   the  
optimal   order   size   for   inventory   items.   The   model   takes   into   consideration   various   costs  
associate   with   inventory   and   determines   the   order   size   which   can   minimize   the   total  
inventory  cost.  EOQ  is  the  economic  ordering  quantity,  the  most  advantageous  amount  for  
the   firm   to   order   each   time.   We   will   determine   this   value,   translate   it   into   average  
inventory   size,   and   determine   the   minimum   total   cost   amount.   The   terms   in   the   EOQ  
formula  are  defined  as  follows:  

S  =  usage  in  units  per  period  or  Total  sales  per  period  

O  =  order  cost  per  order  

C  =  carrying  cost  per  unit  per  period  

Q  =  order  quantity  in  units  

The  first  step  is  to  derive  the  cost  functions  for  order  cost  and  carrying  cost  of  inventory.  
The  order  cost  is  a  product  of  the  cost  per  order  and  the  number  of  orders  (S/Q).  

 Order  cost = O  ×S/Q  

The   carrying   cost   is   equal   to   the   product   a   unit   of   inventory   per   period   and   the   average  
inventory  of  a  business  (Q/2).    

Carrying  cost = C  ×Q/2  

The   total   inventory   cost   of   the   business   can   be   calculated   by   adding   the   Order   cost   and   the  
carrying  cost.    

S Q
Total  cost = (O  × ) +   (C  × )  
Q 2

By  solving  the  above  equation  we  get  the  following  formula.  

2  ×S  ×O
EOQ =  
C

Let  us  assume  that  we  anticipate  selling  2,000  units  during  the  year;  it  will  cost  us  8  to  place  
each   order;   and   the   price   per   unit   is   1,   with   a   20   percent   carrying   cost   to   maintain   the  
average  inventory,  resulting  in  a  carrying  charge  per  unit  of  0.20.  Plugging  these  values  into  
the  formula,  we  show:  

2  ×2000  ×8
EOQ =   = 400  units  
0.20

Financial  Management     Page|  123    


 
 

TOTAL  COSTS  FOR  INVENTORY  


The  optimum  order  size  is  400  units.  On  the  assumption  that  we  will  use  up  inventory  at  a  
constant   rate   throughout   the   year,   our   average   inventory   on   hand   will   be   200   units,   as  
indicated  in  Figure  below.  Average  inventory  equals  EOQ/2.  

Our   total   costs   with   an   order   size   of   400   and   an   average   inventory   size   of   200   units   are  
computed  below.  

!"#$%   !"""
1.   Ordering  costs =     =    5  orders  
!"#$"  !"#$ !""

=  5  orders  at  8  per  order  =  40  

2.   Carrying  costs =  Average  inventory  in  units  ×  Carrying  cost  per  unit    

=  200  x  0.20  =40  

3.     Order  cost      40    


Carrying  cost       +  40    
Total  cost      80  
 
Point  M  in  Figure  on  the  prior  page  can  be  equated  to  a  total  cost  of  80  at  an  order  size  of  
400   units.   At   no   other   order   point   can   we   hope   to   achieve   lower   costs.   The   same   basic  
principles   of   total   cost   minimization   that   we   have   applied   to   inventory   can   be   applied   to  
other   assets   as   well.   For   example,   we   may   assume   cash   has   a   carrying   cost   (opportunity  
cost  of  lost  interest  on  marketable  securities  as  a  result  of  being  in  cash)  and  an  ordering  
cost  (transaction  costs  of  shifting  in  and  out  of  marketable  securities)  and  then  work  toward  
determining  the  optimum  level  of  cash.  In  each  case  we  are  trying  to  minimize  the  overall  
costs  and  increase  profit.  

Financial  Management     Page|  124    


 
 

SAFETY  STOCK  AND  STOCK  OUTS  


In   our   analysis   thus   far   we   have   assumed   we   would   use   inventory   at   a   constant   rate   and  
would   receive   new   inventory   when   the   old   level   of   inventory   reached   zero.   We   have   not  
specifically   considered   the   problem   of   being   out   of   stock.   A   stock   out   occurs   when   a   firm   is  
out  of  a  specific  inventory  item  and  is  unable  to  sell  or  deliver  the  product.  The  risk  of  losing  
sales  to  a  competitor  may  cause  a  firm  to  hold  a  safety  stock  to  reduce  this  risk.  Although  
the   company   may   use   the   EOQ   model   to   determine   the   optimum   order   quantity,  
management  cannot  always  assume  the  delivery  schedules  of  suppliers  will  be  constant  or  
that  there  will  be  delivery  of  new  inventory  when  old  inventory  reaches  zero.  A  safety  stock  
will   guard   against   late   deliveries   due   to   weather,   production   delays,   equipment  
breakdowns,   and   the   many   other   things   that   can   go   wrong   between   the   placement   of   an  
order  and  its  delivery.  A  minimum  safety  stock  will  increase  the  cost  of  inventory  because  
the  carrying  cost  will  rise.  This  cost  should  be  offset  by  eliminating  lost  profits  on  sales  due  
to  stock  outs  and  also  by  increased  profits  from  unexpected  orders  that  can  now  be  filled.  
In  the  prior  example,  if  a  safety  stock  of  50  units  were  maintained,  the  average  inventory  
figure  would  be  250  units.  

EOQ
Average  Inventory =   +  Safety  stock  
2
400
Average  Inventory =   +  50                                        
2

Average  Inventory =  200 + 50 = 250              

The  inventory  carrying  cost  will  now  increase  to  50.    

Carrying  costs     =  Average  inventory  in  units  X  Carrying  cost  per  unit    

=  250  X  0.20  =  50  

The   amount   of   safety   stock   that   a   firm   carries   is   likely   to   be   influenced   by   the   predictability  
of   inventory   usage   and   the   time   period   necessary   to   fill   inventory   orders.   The   following  
discussion  indicates  safety  stock  may  be  reduced  in  the  future.  

JUST-­‐IN-­‐TIME  (JIT)  INVENTORY  MANAGEMENT    


Just-­‐in-­‐time   inventory   management   (JIT)   is   part   of   a   total   production   concept   that   often  
interfaces   with   a   total   quality   management.   It   is   used   to   minimize   inventory   investment.  
The   philosophy   is   that   materials   should   arrive   at   exactly   the   time   they   are   needed   for  
production   or   sale.   In   an   ideal   situation   the   business   should   only   have   work   in   process  
inventory.     JIT   system   uses   no   or   very   little   safety   stock   because   its   objective   is   to   minimize  
investment  in  inventory.  In  order  to  meet  this  objective  an  extensive  coordination  among  
the  employees,  suppliers  and  shipping  companies  of  the  business  must  exist  to  insure  the  
availability  of  material  on  time.  If  the  business  fails  to  do  so  it  results  in  the  shutdown  of  the  

Financial  Management     Page|  125    


 
 
production  line  until  the  material  becomes  available.  Moreover,  a  JIT  system  requires  high  
quality  material  to  minimize  the  quality  issues  in  production.  

The   major   goal   of   the   JIT   inventory   management   system   is   to   ensure   manufacturing  
efficiency.  The  system  uses  inventory  as  tool  to  attain  efficiency  by  emphasizing  quality  and  
timely  delivery  of  material  used.    

TOPIC  5.2  SUMMARY  


The   level   of   inventory   considered   as   appropriate   by   the   financial   managers   are   different  
from   viewpoint   of   marketing,   manufacturing   and   purchasing   managers.   These   managers  
tend   to   have   a   view   of   keeping   higher   inventories   and   they   consider   the   higher   level   of  
inventory   as   the   appropriate   levels.   Three   commonly   used   techniques   for   effectively  
managing  inventory  to  keep  its  level  as  low  as  possible  are  the  ABC  system  ,  the  economic  
order  quantity  (EOQ)  model  and  the  just  in  time  (JIT)  system.    

Self-­‐Reflection  Questions  

1.  What  are  possible  viewpoints  of  each  of  the  following  managers  about  the  
levels  of  the  various  types  of  inventory:  finance,  marketing,  manufacturing  and  
purchasing?  Why  is  the  inventory  considered  as  an  investment?  

2.  Briefly  describe  each  of  the  following  techniques  used  for  inventory  
management:  ABC  system,  economic  order  quantity  (EOQ)  model  and  just  in  time  
(JIT)  system.    

   

Financial  Management     Page|  126    


 
 

TOPIC  5.3  –  CURRENT  LIABILITIES  MANAGEMENT    


TOPIC  5.3  INTRODUCTION  
Liabilities  arising  from  normal  course  of  business  are  known  as  spontaneous  liabilities.    The  
two  key  sources  of  spontaneous  liabilities  are  accounts  payable  and  accruals.  In  response  to  
the  increasing  sales  of  the  business,  the  accounts  payable  and  accruals  increase.  Accounts  
payable   increase   because   the   purchases   become   necessary   to   meet   higher   level   of   sales.  
Whereas  the  accruals  of  the  business  increase  as  wage  and  taxes  increase  because  of  higher  
labour   requirements   and   the   increased   taxes   on   the   higher   income   of   the   business.   Implicit  
explicit.   Both,   accounts   payable   and   accruals   are   types   of   short   term   financing   instruments.  
Short  term  financing  obtained  using  accounts  payable  and  accruals  are  known  as  unsecured  
short-­‐term  financing  because  they  are  obtained  without  any  collateral.  these  interest  free  
short  term  financing  can  prove  to  be  advantageous  for  the  business.    

TOPIC  5.3  OBJECTIVES  


Upon  completion  of  this  topic  you  will  be  able  to:  

1. Identify  the  major  components  of  credit  terms  that  a  business  follows,  and  the  
procedures  for  analysing  them.  
2. Understand  the  relationship  between  stretching  accounts  payable  and  their  cost.  
3. Understand  the  use  of  accruals  as  a  spontaneous  source  of  unsecured  short  term  
financing.  
4. Understand  and  describe  the  rate  of  interest,  the  basic  types  of  unsecured  short  
term  bank  loans  and  basic  features  of  commercial  paper.    
5. Describe  the  various  ways  in  which  inventory  can  be  used  as  short  term  loan  
collateral.    

ACCOUNTS  PAYABLE  MANAGEMENT    


Accounts  payable  are  a  result  of  transactions  in  which  purchases  are  made  without  signing  
any  formal  note  to  show  the  liability  of  the  business  (purchaser).  The  business  agrees  to  pay  
the   required   amount   according   to   the   terms   and   conditions   stated   on   the   invoice   of   the  
supplier  (seller).    

ROLE  OF  ACCOUNTS  PAYABLE  IN  CASH  CONVERSION  CYCLE  


Cash  conversion  cycle  as  discussed  earlier  can  be  represented  in  equation  form  as  :  

Cash  conversion  cycle  (CCC)  =  Operating  Cycle  (OC)  -­‐    Average  payment  Period  (APP)    

The   final   component   of   the   cash   conversion   cycle   is   the   average   payment   period   and   it  
constitutes  of  two  parts    

1.   The  time  from  the  purchase  until  the  payment.  

2.   Float  time  (the  time  from  sending  the  payment  until  the  funds  are  actually  received)  

Financial  Management     Page|  127    


 
 
The  objective  of  the  business  to  delay  the  payment  as  long  as  possible  without  damaging  its  
credit  worthiness.  The  business  aims  to  pay  the  funds  on  the  possible  last  day  considering  
the  credit  terms  of  the  supplier.  For  example  if  the  stated  terms    are  net  30  days,  then  the  
payment  should  be  made  30  days  from  the  start  of  credit  period.  Usually,  the  start  of  credit  
period   is   the   date   of   invoice.   This   approach   helps   business   to   make   maximum   use   of   the  
interest  free  credit  and  does  not  damage  the  credit  worthiness  of  the  business.    

 
Example  –  Role  of  accounts  payable  in  cash  conversion  cycle    
 
Rex   Limited   has   an   average   payment   period   of   35   days  which   consists   of   30   days   until  
  payment  was   mailed   and   5   days   as  float   time.   The  average  accounts  payable  equals  
947,916.   Thus   Rex   limited   can   generate   27,084   (947,916/35)   of   accounts   payable  
 
daily.   If   Rex   Limited  has   to  mail  it  payments  in   35   days   instead  of  30  days,  its  accounts  
  payable   will   increase   by   135,420   (27,084   X   5).As   a   result   of   this,   Rex   limited’s   cash  
conversion   cycle   will   decrease   by   5   days,   and   its   investments   in   operations   will  
  decrease   by   135,420.   It   is   in   the   best   interest   of   business,   if   this   action   does   not  
damage  the  credit  rating  of  Rex  limited.    
 

CREDIT  TERMS  
The  credit  terms  offered  to  a  business  by  the  supplier  facilitate  the  delay  in  the  payments.  
The  purchase  price  of  the  merchandise  reflects  the  cost  of  having  funds  tied  up  in  the  sold  
merchandise.  Therefore,  the  purchaser  is  already  entitled  to  apply  for  this  benefit.  A  careful  
analysis   of   the   credit   terms   are   needed   in   order   to   determine   the   best   strategy   for   trade  
credit.   If   the   business   has   offered   the   credit   terms   with   some   form   of   cash   discount   then   in  
that  case  it  has  two  options  to  choose  from    

1. Take  the  discount    


2. Give  up  the  discount  

If  the  business  plans  to  take  the  discount  it  will  have  to  make  the  payment  on  the  last  day  
of  the  discount  period.    

 
Example  –  Credit  terms  (a)  
 
LK   industries   purchased   2,000   worth   of   merchandise   on   March   30,   terms   of   2/10  
  net  30  EOM  (end  of  month).  If  the  business  decides  to  take  the  cash  discount,  it  can  
save  40  by  paying  1960[2,000  –  (2%  X  2,000)]  on  April  10.  
 

Alternatively,  if  the  business  plans  to  give  up  the  discount,  it  will  have  to  make  the  payment  
on  the  last  day  of  the  credit  period.  There  is  no  cost  associated  with  the  option  of  take  up  
the  cash  discount  but  in  case  of  giving  up  the  discount,  there  is    implicit  cost  associated  with  

Financial  Management     Page|  128    


 
 
it  in  the  form  of  implied  interest  rate.  This  implied  cost  will  be  equal  to  the  total  discount  
given  up.  

Example  –  Credit  terms  (b)  

In   the   preceding   example,   LK   industries   could   have   taken   the   cash   discount   by   paying  
1960   on   April   10.   LK   industries   can   pay   by   April   30   if   it   decides   to   give   up   the   cash  
discount.  The  business  can  keep  the  money  for  extra  20  days  if  it  gives  up  an  opportunity  
to   save   40.   In   other   words,   it   will   cost   the   business   40   to   delay   payment   for   20   days.  
Figure  shows  the  payment  options  available  to  LK  industries.    

 
 

The  true  purchase  price  needs  to  be  viewed  as  the  discounted  cost  of  the  merchandise  to  
calculate  the  cost  of  giving  up  the  cash  discount.  The  discounted  cost  of  merchandise  for  LK  
industries   is   1,960.   The   annual   percentage   cost   of   giving   up   the   cash   discount   can   be  
calculated  as  follows:  

Cost  of  giving  up  cash  discount  =                CD                X        360  


100%  -­‐  CD          N  

  Where  

CD  =  Stated  Cash  Discount  in  percentage            

N  =  Number  of  days  that  payment  can  be  delayed  by  giving  up  cash  discount    

An  annualized  cost  of  giving  up  cash  discount  for  LK  industries  is  36.73%  [(2%÷98%)  ×  (360  ÷  
20)].  A  360  days  year  is  assumed  in  this  example.    

Financial  Management     Page|  129    


 
 
A  simple  way  to  calculate  the  approximate  cost  of  giving  up  cash  discount  is  as  follows:  

Approximate  cost  of  giving  up  cash  discount    =     CD  ×  360  


                                           N  
The  approximation  is  closer  to  the  actual  cost  of  giving  up  cash  discount  if  the  cash  discount  
is  smaller.  Using  the  above  mentioned  approximation  technique,  the  cost  of  giving  up  cash  
discount  for  LK  industries  is  36%  [2%×  (360  ÷  20)].  

It  is  responsibility  of  the  financial  manager  to  decide  whether  to  take  the  discount  or  not.  
The   decision   must   be   made   by   taking   into   account   the   fact   that   taking   cash   discount  
represents  a  source  of  additional  profit  for  the  business.    

Example  –  Credit  terms  (c)  


A   large   building   supply   company,   Watford   products,   has   four   different   suppliers,  
offering   different   credit   terms.   The   product   and   services   of   these   suppliers   are  
identical.   Table   below   represents   the   credit   terms   offered   by   each   supplier   and   the  
cost  of  giving  up  the  cash  discount.    

If  the  company  needs  short  term  funds  which  are  available  from  bank  at  13%  interest  
rate  and   if  each  supplier  is  viewed   separately,   which  of  the  suppliers’  cash  discount  
will   the   company   give   up?   The   company   takes   the   cash   discount,   in   dealing   with  
supplier  A,  because  the  cost  of  giving  up  the  cash  discount  (36%)  is  higher  than  the  
cost   of   borrowing   the   funds   (13%).   With   supplier   B,   the   company   should   decide   to  
give  up  the  cash  discount  because  the  cost  of  giving  up  cash  discount  (8%)  is  lower  as  
compared  to  cost  of  borrowing  funds  from  bank  (13%).  Dealing  with  supplier  D  and  
supplier   E,   the   company   should   take   up   the   cash   discount   because   in   both   of   the  
cases  the  cost  of  giving   u p   cash  discount  is   greater  than  that  of  borrowing  from  the  
bank  (21.6%  and  28.8%  versus  13%).    
 

The   above   example   shows   that   the   cost   of   giving   up   cash   discount   is   only   relevant   when  
one   is   evaluating   a   single   supplier’s   credit   terms   in   the   light   of   specific   bank   borrowing  
costs.  Nevertheless,  there  is  a  need  to  consider  other  factors  relative  to  payment  strategies.  
Some   businesses,   e.g.   small   or   poorly   managed   businesses,   give   up   all   discounts   because  

Financial  Management     Page|  130    


 
 
sources   of   un   secured   short   term   loans   are   scarce   or   not   available.   Or   the   businesses   fail   to  
recognize  the  implicit  costs  of  their  action  of  giving  up  the  discount.    

EFFECTS  OF  STRETCHING  ACCOUNTS  PAYABLE  


By   stretching   the   accounts   payable   we   mean   that   paying   bills   of   the   business   as   late   as  
possible   without   damaging   the   credit   worthiness   of   the   business.     Stretching   accounts  
payable   may   be   attractive   financially   but   an   important   ethical   issue   is   associated   with   it.  
The  ethical  issue  associated  with  it  is  that  it  can  cause  the  violation  of  the  agreements  the  
business   entered   when   purchasing   the   merchandise.   Obviously,   the   credibility   of   the  
business,  who  purposely  delay  the  payments  for  its  purchases,  would  be  damaged.    

  Example  –Effects  of  stretching  accounts  payable  


 
LK  industries  was  extended  credit  terms  of  2/10  net  30  EOM  (End  of  month).  In  the  earlier  
  example,  the  cost  of  giving  up  the  cash  discount  was  approximately  36%[2%×  (360  ÷  20)].  
  The  cost  of  giving  up  the  cash  discount  would  be  only  12%[2%×  (360  ÷  60)],  if  the  business  
  was   able   to   stretch     its   accounts   payable  to   70  days.   Clearly,  the   implicit  cost   of   giving  up  
  cash  discount  is  reduced  by  stretching  accounts  payable.  
 
 
ACCRUALS  
Another  spontaneous  source  of  unsecured  short  term  financing  is  the  accruals.  Accruals  are  
the  form  of  liabilities  for  services  received  but  payment  has  not  been  made.  The  common  
example  of  accruals  are  wages  and  taxes.  Tax  accrual  cannot  be  manipulated  because  they  
are  payment  to  the  government.  Businesses  can  manipulate  the  wages  accrual  by  delaying  
the   payment   to   the   employees.     This   results   in   receiving   an   interest   free   credit   from   the  
employees  of  the  business.  The  pay  period  for  hourly  rate  workers  are  regulated  by  state  or  
federal   law   but   the   frequency   of   the   payment   is   at   the   discretion   of   management   of   the  
business.    

 
Example  –Accruals  
  Apollo   Limited   currently   pays   its   employees   weekly   and   its   weekly   payroll   totals  
800,000.  If  the  company  were  to  extend  the  pay  period  by  1  week  throughout  an  entire  
 
year,   the   company  would   be   borrowing   800,000   from   the  employees  for  a  year.   With  a  
  10%   annual   earning   rate   on   invested   funds,   the   company   could   earn   80,000   (10%   X  
800,000)  per  year.  
 

SOURCES  OF  UN  SECURED  SHORT  TERM  FINANCING:  


The   two   major   sources   of   unsecured   short   term   financing   are   commercial   banks   and  
commercial  papers.  These  sources  are  different  from  the  spontaneous  sources  as  they  are  

Financial  Management     Page|  131    


 
 
the   result   of   negotiation   and   action   taken   by   the   financial   manager   of   the   business.   Bank  
loans   are   available   to   all   sizes   of   business   as   compared   to   the   commercial   papers   which   are  
only   available   to   large   firms   only.   In   addition   to   this   if   a   business   is   involved   in   international  
activity,  it  can  use  international  loans  to  finance  the  international  transactions.    

COMMERCIAL  BANK  LOANS  


Bank  loans  are  the  most  popular  and  major  source  of  unsecured  short  term  financing  to  the  
businesses.  The  common  type  of  short  term  loan  provided  by  banks  is  the  self  liquidating  
loan  which  is  designed  to  meet  the  financing  needs  during  the  seasonal  peaks  only.      The  
financing   needs   of   the   business   during   the   seasonal   peaks   rises   just   because   of   the   build-­‐
ups  of  the  inventory  and  account  receivables.  The  term  “self  liquidating”  is  used  for  these  
type  of  loans  because  the  funds  to  retire  the  loans  are  generated  as  soon  as  the  inventories  
and   accounts   receivable   are   converted   into   cash.   The   basic   ways,   the   banks   use   to   lend   the  
unsecured  short  term  loans  are:    the  single  payment  notes,  lines  of  credit  and  the  revolving  
credit  agreements.    

LOAN  INTEREST  RATES  


Based  on  prime  rate  of  interest,  the  interest  rate  can  be  fixed  or  floating  rate  the  prime  rate  
of  interest,  also  known  as  prime  rate,  is  the  lowest  interest  rate  charged  by  leading  banks  
on   business   loans.   The   changes   in   the   demand   and   supply   of   the   short   term   loans   are  
responsible  for  any  fluctuations  in  the  prime  rate.  Commercial  banks  determine  the  rate  of  
interest   for   various   customers   (borrowers)   by   adding   a   premium   to   the   prime   rate.   The  
premium  is  added  to  adjust  for  the  riskiness  of  the  borrower  and  may  be  up  to  4  percent  or  
more.   Typically,   the   premium   for   most   of   the   unsecured   short   term   loans   is   less   than   2  
percent.    

FIXED  RATE  AND  FLOATING  RATE  


Two   possible   types   of   interest   rates   are   fixed   or   floating.   A   fixed   rate   of   interest   is  
determined  on  the  date  of  a  loan  at  a  set  increment  above  the  prime  rate  and  it  remains  
unchanged  until  maturity  of  loan.  A  floating  rate  of  interest  is  initially  set  at  an  increment  
above   the   prime   rate   and   is   allowed   to   vary   above   prime   as   the   prime   rate   varies   until  
maturity.  Typically,  the  increment  above  prime  rate  on  a  fixed  rate  loan  will  be  higher  than  
on  a  floating  rate  loan  of  equivalent  risk  because  the  lender  bears  high  risk  will  fixed  rate  
loan.   If   the   prime   rate   is   unstable   in   nature   then   most   short   term   loans   are   floating   rate  
loans  and  vice  versa.    

COMPUTING  INTEREST  
The   method   of   computing   interest   is   determined   after   establishing   the   nominal   or   stated  
annual   rate.   Interest   can   be   paid   either   in   advance   or   at   maturity   of   loan.   Most   of   the  
commercial   bank   loans   requires   the   interest   payment   at   maturity.   If   the   interest   is   paid  
when   the   loan   matures   then   the   effective   (true)   annual   rate   for   1   year   period   can   be  
calculated  as:  

Financial  Management     Page|  132    


 
 
                     Interest                .      
Amount  borrowed  
If  interest  is  paid  in  advance  then  it  is  deducted  from  the  loan  and  the  borrower  receives  
less   money   than   what   is   requested.     This   type   of   loan   is   known   as   a   discount   loan   and  
effective  annual  interest  rate  for  1  year  discount  loan  can  be  calculated  as:  

                               Interest                                        .      
Amount  borrowed  –  Interest    
The   effective   annual   rate   rises   above   the   stated   annual   rate,   if   the   borrower   decides   to   pay  
i
n
t Example  –Computing  Interest  
e A   manufacturer   of   apparel   wants  to   borrow  5,000  at  an  annual   rate  of  10%   interest  for  
r 1  year.  The  business  (borrower)  will  pay  500  (10%  X  5,000)  for  the  use  of  5,000  for  1  year  
e ,   if   the   interest   is   paid   at   maturity.   Using   the   given   formula   to   calculate   the   effective  
s annual  rate  of  interest,  the  effective  annual  rate  is  10%  (500  ÷  5,000)  
t
  If  the   interest   is   paid  in  advance,   the   business   will   pay   same  500   in   interest,   but   receives  
o only  4,500  (5,000  -­‐   500).  Using   the  given   formula   to  calculate   the  effective  interest   rate  
n in   this   case   will   be   11.1%   [500÷(5,000   -­‐   500)].   Hence,   advance   payment   of   interest  
  makes  the  effective  annual  rate  greater  than  the  stated  rate  of  interest.    
l
oan  in  advance.  

 
 
THE  SINGLE  PAYMENT  NOTES  
A   one-­‐time   short   term   loan   made   to   a   credit   worthy   business   borrower   by   a   commercial  
bank  is  known  as  the  single  payment  note.  This  one-­‐time  loan  is  to  meet  a  specific  need  of  
the   business.   The   borrower   signs   a   note(instrument)that   states   the   terms  and   conditions   of  
the  loan  i.e.  the  length  of  the  loan,  the  interest  rate  and  the  maturity.    

Financial  Management     Page|  133    


 
 

Example  –Single  Payment  Notes  


Westcliff  limited,   a   manufacturer  of   blades,   recently  borrowed  from  Bank  A  and  Bank  
B,   200,000   from   each   bank   for   90   days   period.   The   loans   were   incurred   when   the  
prime  rate  was   9%.   Regardless  of  fluctuations  in   prime   rate,  the  interest   rate   on  fixed  
rate   loan   form   bank   A   was   determined   by   adding   1.5%   increment   in   the   existing  
prime   rate   (9%   +  1.5%   =   10.5%).   The   total   interest  cost   on   this   loan   is   5,250   [200,000  
X   (10.5%   X   90/360)].   The   effective   90   day   rate     on   this   loan   is   2.625%   (5,250   ÷  
200,000).  

Assuming  that  under  same  terms  and  circumstances,  the  loan  is  rolled  over  each  90  
days   throughout   the   year   then   its   effective   annual   rate   of   interest   is   10.92%  
[(1+0.02625)4    -­‐  1].  It  is  because  the  cost  of  loan  is  2.625%  for  90  days  ,  therefore,  it  is  
necessary  to  compound    (1  +  0.02625)  for  four  90  days  periods  in  the  year  and  then  
subtract  1.    

Bank   B   set  the   interest   rate   on  its   floating  rate   loan,   at   1%   above   the  prime   rate.   The  
charged  rate  of  interest   will   vary   with  the   fluctuations   in  the   prime  rate.  Initially,   the  
interest   rate  is  10%  (9%   +   1%).   If   the   prime  rate   changes  rises   30   days  to   9.5%  and  
after  next   30  days  drops  to  9.25%,  then  the  borrower  will  be   paying  0.833%  (10%  X  
30/360)   for   the   first   30     days,   0.875%   (10.25%   X   30/360)   for   the   next   30   days   and  
0.854%  (10%  X  30/360)  for  the  last  30  days.  The  total  interest  cost  on  the  loan  will  be  
5,124  [200,000  X  (0.833%  +  0.875%  +  0.854%)]  and  the  effective  90  days  interest  rate  
will  be  2.562%  (  5,124  ÷  200,000).  

Again   assuming   that   under   same   terms   and   circumstances,   the   loan   is   rolled   over  
each  90  days  throughout  the   year  then  its  effective  annual  rate  of  interest  is  10.65%  
[(1   +   0.02562)4     -­‐   1].   In   the   case   of   floating   rate   loan,   the   effective   annual   rate   is  
lower  than  that  of  fixed  rate  loan.  Therefore,  the  floating  rate  loan  is  less  expensive  
than  the  fixed  rate  loan.    
 

LINES  OF  CREDIT  


An  agreement  between  a  commercial  bank  and  a  business  with  specified  short  term  funds  
which  the  bank  will  make  available  to  the  business  over  a  given  period  of  time  is  known  as  
line   of   credit.   A   similar   example   of   this   is   the   credit   card   agreement   under   which   banks  
extend   the   pre-­‐approved   credit   to   the   cardholders.   A   line   of   credit   agreement   is   not   a  
guaranteed  loan  and  is  usually  made  for  a  period  of  one    year.  The  availability  of  the  funds  
to  the  borrower  is  subject  to  the  condition  of  the  bank  having  sufficient  funds  available.  At  
any  point  in  time,  the  maximum  amount  a  business  can  owe  the  bank    is  equal  to  the  total  
agreed  amount  of  the  line  of  credit.    

Financial  Management     Page|  134    


 
 
The   documents   needed   to   apply   for   the   line   of   credit   could   include   cash   budget,   pro-­‐forma  
financial  statements  and  recent  financial  statements  of  the  borrower  business.  This  type  of  
loan  is  attractive  for  banks  to  offer  as  the  banks  do  not  have  to  check  the  creditworthiness  
of  the  business  each  time  the  business  borrows  the  money.    

INTEREST  RATE:  
The   interest   rate   charged   to   the   line   of   credit   is   usually   a   floating   rate.   A   floating   rate   is   the  
prime   rate   plus   a   premium   which   is   also   known   as   the   interest   increment.   the   amount   of  
premium   is   decided   on   the   basis   of   credit   worthiness   of   the   business.   The   interest   rate  
charged  on  the  new  borrowings  and   all   outstanding   borrowings   changes   with   the   change   in  
the  prime  rate.  

OPERATING  CHANGE  RESTRICTIONS  


The   line   of   credit   provider   can   restrict   the   business   in   the   agreement   not   to   undergo   any  
major   financial   or   operational   changes.   The   line   of   credit   extender   can   cancel   the   line   in  
case  of  any  major  changes.  Changes  in  the  key  personnel  of  the  business  or  operations  may  
affect   its   debt   paying   ability   and   expected   future   success   hence   altering   the   credit  
worthiness   of     the   business.   Therefore,   the   loan   extender(bank)   needs   to   informed   about  
any  of  these  changes  before  taking  place.  In  addition  to  this,  the  business  is  also  required  to  
provide   the   regular   audited   or   unaudited   financial   statements   for   the   purpose   of   periodic  
review.    

COMPENSATING  BALANCES  
The   single   payment   notes   and   lines   of   credit   require   the   borrowers   to   maintain   a  
compensating   balance   equal   to   a   specific   percentage(e.g.   10-­‐20   percent)   of   the   total  
borrowed   amount   in   order   to   keep   the   good   reputation.   Not   only   the   compensating  
balance   ensures   the   borrower   will   be   a   good   borrower   but     it   also   increases   the   cost   of   the  
interest  to  the  customer.    

Financial  Management     Page|  135    


 
 

Example  –Compensating  balances  


Strata   designs,   an   interior   design   company,   has   borrowed   2   million   under   a   line   of  
credit   agreement.  According   to  the  terms  of  the   line  of  credit,  the   interest  rate  is   10%  
and  the  company  is  required  to  m aintain  the  20%(400,000)  of  total  borrowed  amount  
as   compensating  balance.  Therefore,   the   company  (borrower)   can  only   use   1,600,000  
out   of   the  total  borrowed   amount  by   paying   interest  of  200,000   (10%  X  2,000,000).  
Thus,   the   effective   annual   rate   on   borrowed   funds   is   12.5%   (200,000/1,600,000)  
which  is  2.5%  more  than  the  stated  interest  rate  (10%).  

If  the   company   maintains   a  balance   of   400,000   or  m ore   in  its   checking   account,   none  
of   the   borrowed   2   million   is   needed   to   satisfy   the   requirement   of   compensating  
balance   and   the   effective   annual   rate   equals   the   stated   annual   interest   rate.   If   the  
company   normally   maintains   a   balance   of   200,000   in   its   checking   account,   only  
200,000   from   the   borrowed   amount   will   be   required   leaving   1,800,000   of   usable  
funds.   Hence,  a  compensating  balance  is  responsible   for  the   increase  in   cost   of   a   loan  
only  if  it  is  larger  than  the  company’s  (borrower)  normal  cash  balance.    
 

ANNUAL  CLEANUPS  
In  case  of  a  line  of  credit,  the  bank  requires  the  borrower  to  have  a  zero  loan  balance  for  
certain  number  of  days  during  the  period  of  extended  loan.  This  requirement  is  regarded  as  
annual   cleanup.   The   idea   behind   the   annual   cleanups   are   to   ensure   that   the   business   is  
using  the  funds  just  to  meet  its  seasonal  needs  and  the  short  terms  loans  are  not  taking  the  
form  of  long  term  loans.    

All   of   the   above   mentioned   characteristics   of   the   lines     of   credit   are   flexible   to   some   extent  
because   the   banks   want   to   attract   large   and   well-­‐known   businesses.   It   is   important   for   a  
borrower   to   negotiate   the   optimal   level   of   funds   with   minimum   restrictions   and   a   most  
favourable   rate   of   interest.   In   today’s’   world,   borrowers   are   not   interested   in   maintaining   a  
deposit,   instead,   they   are   ready   to   pay   extra   fees   to   the   lenders.   On   the   other   hand   the  
lenders  are  concerned  with  maximum  safety  to  get  good  return.  Negotiations  can  help  the  
borrowers  and  lenders  to  produce  a  most  suitable  line  of  credit.    

REVOLVING  CREDIT  AGREEMENT  


Revolving   credit   is   simply   a   line   of   credit   guaranteed   to   a   borrower   business   by   a  
commercial  bank  regardless  of  the  scarcity  of  the  funds.  It  also  includes  a  commitment  fee  
because   of   the   guarantee   provided   by   the   bank   for   the   availability   of   money.   This   fee   is  
usually  applied  to  the  average  unused  balance  of  the  loan  and  is  about  0.5  percent.  The  rate  
of  interest  and  other  terms  are  similar  to  those  of  line  of  credit.      

Financial  Management     Page|  136    


 
 

Example  –Revolving  credit  agreement  


ABC  Limited,  a  real  estate  developer  has  a  4  m illion  revolving  credit  agreement  with  a  
bank   with   a   commitment   fee   of   0.5%.   Average   borrowings   of   the   business   for   the  
past   1   year   was   3   million.   The   commitment   fee   for   the   year   was   5,000   (0.5%   X  
1,000,000)   because   the   average   unused   portion   of   funds   was   1   million   (4million   -­‐  
3million).   ABC   limited   also   had   to   pay   interest   of   320,000   on   the   actual   3   million  
borrowed   funds.   The   effective   cost   of   agreement   was   10.83%   [(320,000   +  
5,000)/3,000,000].  Although,  revolving  credit   is  more  expensive  than  the  line   of  credit  
but,  from  borrower’s  point  of  view,   it   is   less  risky   because   the   availability  of  the   funds  
are  guaranteed.    
 

COMMERCIAL  PAPER  
It  is  form  financing  used  by  very  large  business  with  unquestionable  financial  position.  It  is  a  
promissory  note  with  maturity  ranging  from  3  to  270  days.  Business  with  high  credit  rating  
can  issue  a  promissory  note  as  a  form  of  short  term  unsecured  financing.  There  are  no  set  
denominations   for   the   commercial   papers   and   they   can   be   issued   in   the   multiples   of  
100,000.   Examples   of   well   reputed   business   issuing   commercial   papers   are   the   finance  
companies   and   manufacturing   businesses.   The   businesses   that   purchases   the   commercial  
papers  hold  them  as  marketable  securities  in  their  books  of  accounts  to  provide  a  reserve  
for  liquidity.      

INTEREST  RATE  ON  COMMERCIAL  PAPER  


Commercial   papers   are   sold   at   a   discount   from   the   face(par)   value   and   the   interest   is  
determined  by  the  size  of  discount  and  the  maturity  time.  The  actual  interest  earned  by  the  
purchaser  can  be  calculated  by  calculations  given  in  the  example.  

 
Example  –  Interest  rate  on  commercial  paper  
 
A  large  ship  building  company  issued  commercial  paper  with  500,000  par  value  with  90  day  
  maturity  and  sells  for  490,000.  The  purchaser  will  receive  500,000  at  maturity  (the  end  of  
90  days).  Therefore,  the  interest  paid  on  the  financing  is  10,000  on  a  principle  of  490,000  
  and  the  effective  rate  on  the  paper  is  2.04%  (10,000/490,000).    

The   interest   cost   of   a   commercial   paper   is   normally   2   to   4   percent   below   the   prime   rate  
which   enables   the   businesses   to   raise   the   cheap   funds   as   compared   to   borrowings   from  
commercial  banks.  The  reason  behind  this  interesting  characteristic  is  that  the  short  term  
loan  providers  do  not  have  the  option  like  banks  to  make  low  risk    business  loans  at  a  prime  
rate.   Although,   the   cost   of   inters   on   commercial   paper   may   be   lower   but   the   overall   cost   of  
commercial   paper   may   not   be   lower   than   that   of   a   commercial   bank   loan.   There   are  
additional   cost   associated   with   the   commercial   papers   e.g.   the   floatation   cost,   fees   to  

Financial  Management     Page|  137    


 
 
obtain  the  bank  line  of  credit  to  back  the  paper  and  fees  to  obtain  rating  from  a  third  party.  
The   decision   of   borrowing   short   term   funds   depends   on   prompt   availability   of   the   funds  
and  a  reasonable  rate  of  interest.  

SECURED  SHORT  TERM  FINANCING    


This  is  the  type  of  financing  which  a  business  prefers  after  exhausting  the  unsecured  short  
term   financing   sources.   The   type   of   a   short   term   that   has   a   specific   asset   pledged   as   a  
collateral   is   known   as   the   secured   short   term   financing.   The   collateral   could   be   any   form   of  
asset   e.g.   accounts   receivable   or   inventory.   Secured   short   term   financing   involves   the  
security  agreement  between  the  lender  and  the  borrower.  A  security  agreement  specifies  
the  collateral  held  against  the  secured  short  term  loan.  Also  both  parties  agree  on  interest  
rate,   a   repayment   date   and   other   provisions.   A   copy   of   the   security   agreement   needs   to   be  
filed  with  a  county  or  state  court  to  provide  information  to  the  subsequent  lenders  about  
the  assets  of  the  borrower  that  are  unavailable  to  use  as  a  collateral.  This  filing  requirement  
acts  as  a  protection  to  the  lender  by  establishing  legally  the  security  interest  of  the  lender.    

CHARACTERISTICS  OF  SECURED  SHORT  TERM  FINANCING  


In   the   eye   of   lenders,   the   collateral   can   reduce   losses   in   the   case   of   borrower’s   default.   The  
collateral   ensures   the   recovery   of   some   funds   in   the   event   of   default.   Lenders   are   more  
interested   in   the   repayment   of   loan   by   the   borrower   as   scheduled.   The   lenders   prefer   to  
extend  less  risky  loans  at  low  rate  of  interest  than  to  be  in  a  situation  in  which  they  have  to  
opt  the  option  to  liquidate  the  collateral  for  recovery  of  some  funds.    

COLLATERAL  AND  TERMS  


Lenders  of  secured  short  term  loan  lenders  prefer  the  collateral  with  a  life  closely  matched  
to   the   term   of   the   loan.   As   mentioned   earlier   accounts   receivables   and   inventory   are   the  
common   types   of   collaterals.   They   are   most   desirable   types   of   collaterals   because   these  
assets  can  be  converted  into  cash  very  quickly  as  compared  to  fixed  types  of  assets.    

Desirable  percentage  advance  is  determined  by  the  lender    to  make  against  the  collateral.  
Percentage   advance   is   the   percentage   of   the   book   value   of   the   collateral   (asset)   that  
constitutes   the   principle   of   a   secured   short   term   loan.   It   is   normally   between   30   to   100  
percent   of   the   book   value   of   the   collateral   (asset)   and   is   dependent   on   the   type   and  
liquidity  of  collateral.    

The   interest   rate   of   a   secured   short   term   loan   is   usually   higher   than   that   of   a   un   secured  
short   term   loan.   The   interest   rate   on   these   types   of   loans   is   not   higher   because   the   lenders  
consider   them   more   risky   but   it   is   higher   because   the   secured   short   term   loans   involves  
troublesome   negotiations   and   administration.   Therefore,   the   added   compensation   is  
normally  added  by  the  lenders  in  the  form  of  service  charge,  a  higher  interest  rate  or  both.  

The   chief   source   of   secured   short   term   loans   are   the   commercial   banks   and   finance  
companies.   These   institution   deal   with   the   secured   short   term   loans   backed   by   the  

Financial  Management     Page|  138    


 
 
accounts   receivable   and   inventory.   Commercial   finance   companies   are   the   lending  
institutions   that   offer   short   term   and   long   term   secured   loans   only.   And   the   commercial  
finance   companies   are   not   allowed   to   hold   the   deposits   like   commercial   banks.   The  
borrower  decides  to  opt  for  loan  option  from  finance  company  only  when  it  is  unsecured  
and   secured   short   term   financing   options   from   commercial   banks   are   exhausted.   The  
interest   rate   on   the   loans   from   finance   companies   are   higher   as   compared   to   the  
commercial   bank   because     the   finance   companies   generally   ends   up   with   higher   risk  
business  borrowers.    

ACCOUNTS  RECEIVABLE  AS  COLLATERAL  


Accounts   receivable   can   be   used   as   collateral   by   pledging   them   or   factoring   them.   In   reality  
secured   short   term   loan   can   be   created   by   pledging   but   not   factoring   because   factoring  
involves  the  sale  of  accounts  receivable  at  a  discount.  However,  factoring  does  involve  the  
use  of  accounts  receivable  to  obtain  the  secured  short  term  funds.    

PLEDGING  ACCOUNTS  RECEIVABLE  


The  use  of  accounts  receivable  as  a  collateral  to  obtain  a  secured  short  term  loan  is  known  
as  pledging  the  accounts  receivables.  Accounts  receivable  are  the  attractive  form  of  a  loan  
collateral  because  of  the  highly  liquid  nature.    

The   process   of   pledging   accounts   receivable   involves   the   determination   of   their  


attractiveness   as   collateral,   by   the   lender.   The   lender   then   prepares   a   list   of   the   acceptable  
accounts  with  dates  of  billing  and  amounts.  It  the  business  borrower  requires  the  loan  for  a  
fixed  amount  then  in  that  case  the  lender  then  selects  the  enough  accounts  to  secure  the  
requested   short   term   funds.   On   the   other   hand,   if   the   business   borrower   requires   the  
maximum  available  loan  then  the  lender  evaluates  all  the  accounts  receivable  to  determine  
the  maximum  amount  of  collateral.    

After   completing   the   selection   procedure   of   the   accounts   receivable,   the   lender   adjusts   the  
dollar   value   of   selected   accounts   receivable   for   expected   customer   returns   and   other  
allowances.   If   a   customer   of   the   borrower   business     returns   merchandise   or   receive   any  
form  of  allowance  such  as  cash  discount  on  early  payment,  the  collateral  is  reduced  by  the  
same  amount.  The  dollar  value  adjustment  by  a  fixed  percentage  are  made  to  reduce  the  
value  of  the  collateral  to  protect  the  lender  from  such  occurrences.  

Next   step   is   to   determine   the   percentage   to   be   advanced   by   the   lender   against   the  
collateral.   The   percentage   to   be   advanced   is   determined   by   evaluating   the   quality   of  
accounts   receivable   and   their   expected   liquidation   cost.   The   determined   percentage  
represents  the  principle  of  the  extended  loan  and  it  ranges  between  50  to  90  percent  of  the  
face   value   of   acceptable   receivables.     In   addition   the   lender   also   files   a   lieu   to   protect   its  
interest  in  collateral.  A  lieu  is  simply  a  publicly  disclosed  legal  claim  on  an  asset  (collateral).  

Financial  Management     Page|  139    


 
 
Non-­‐notification  basis  are  used  to  pledge  accounts  receivable.  By  non  notification  basis  we  
mean  that  the  customer  whose  account  has  been  pledged  as  collateral  is  not  notified  by  the  
borrower   business.   Under   such   arrangement,   the   lender   trusts   the   borrower   to   remit   the  
payments   from   the   customers   (accounts   receivable)   as   they   are   received.   In   case   the  
accounts   receivable   are   pledged   on   notification   basis,   the   customer   of   the   borrower  
business  is  notified  to  make  direct  payments  to  the  lender.  

Pledging   cost   of   the   accounts   receivable   is   normally   2   -­‐   5   percent   higher   than   the   prime  
rate.   Moreover,   to   cover   the   administration   costs,   a   service   charge    of  up  to  3  percent   may  
be  imposed  by  the  lender.  Hence,  pledges  of  accounts  receivable  are  a  source  of  financing  
with  high  cost.  

FACTORING  ACCOUNTS  RECEIVABLE  


Selling   accounts   receivable   outright   to   a   financial   institution   at   a   discount   is   known   as  
factoring.   It   is   known   as   factoring   because   by   factor   we   mean   a   financial   institution.   A  
special  financial  institution  which  specializes  in  purchase  of  accounts  receivables  is  known  
as  a  factor.  Some  commercial  banks  and  finance  companies  also  offer  services  of  factoring  
accounts  receivable.  Factoring  accounts  receivable  are  somehow  similar  to  borrowings  with  
accounts  receivables  as  collateral  but  not  the  exactly  the  same  as  obtaining  the  short  term  
loans  with  accounts  receivables  as  collateral.  

The   detailed   conditions   and   procedures   are   stated   in   the   factoring   agreement.     Like   a  
lender,  a  factor  (financial  institution)  chooses  the  accounts  receivable  for  purchase  and  only  
selects  those  accounts  which  involves  less  credit  risks.  If  a  business  chooses  the  option  of  
factoring  on   a  continuous  basis,  the  factor  (financial  institution)  will  take  the  responsibility  
to   make   credit   decisions   of   the   business   because   this   will   guarantee   the   acceptability   of  
accounts   receivable.   Factoring   involves   notification   basis   which   means   the   factor   is  
responsible  to  absorb  the  loss  in  case  any  of  the  account  receivable  becomes  uncollectible.    

A   general   practice   is   that   the   factor   does   not   pay   to   the   business   until   the   account   is  
collected   or   until   the   last   day   of     the   credit   period,   whichever   occurs   first.   An   account  
similar  to  the  bank    deposit  account  is  set  up  by  the  factor  for  each  customer  (the  borrower  
business).  The  factor  deposits  money  into  the  customer’s  (the  borrower  business)  account  
as   any   payment   is   received   or   as   the   due   date   arrives.   From   this   account   the   seller   of  
accounts  receivable  (the  borrower  business)  is  free  to  withdraw  money  as  needed.  

Commissions,  interest  charge  on  advances  and  interest  earned  on  surplus  are  the  different  
types  of  costs  regarded  as  factoring  costs.  The  amount,  factor  (financial  institution)  deposits  
in   the   account   of   the   seller   (the   borrower   business)   is   equal   to   the   book   value   of   the  
purchased  accounts  receivable  less  the  agreed  commissions.  Usually,  1  to  3  percent  of  the  
book   value   of   accounts   receivable   are   stated   as   commissions.   Whereas,   the   interest   charge  
is   typically   2   to   4   percent   above   the   prime   rate   and   it   is   charged   on   the   actual   amount.   The  
interest  payments  on  the  surpluses  are  0.2  to  0.5  percent  per  month.    

Financial  Management     Page|  140    


 
 
Some  of  the  advantages  make  factoring  attractive  to  the  businesses,  regardless  of  its  high  
cost.   One   of   the   advantage   is   the   ability   of   factoring   to   turn   accounts   receivable  
immediately   into   cash.   Another   advantage   is   that   it   guarantees   the   business   a   known  
pattern  of  cash  inflow  and  if  the  business  opt  for  factoring  on  continuing  basis,  the  business  
can  eliminate  the  credit  and  collection  departments.      

INVENTORY  AS  COLLATERAL  


As   a   short   term   loan   collateral,   inventory   is   second   to   accounts   receivable.   The   market  
value  of  the  inventory  establishes  its  value  as  collateral  and  generally  the  market  value  of  
inventory   is   greater   than   its   book   value.   If   the   borrower   defaults   on   his   obligations,   the  
lender  would  be  able  to  sell  that  collateral  (inventory)  for  at  least  its  book  value.    

The   most   important   characteristic   to   evaluate   inventory   as   loan   collateral   is   its  


marketability   in   the   light   of   its   physical   properties.   Perishable   items,   such   as   fresh  
tomatoes,   may   be   marketable   but   may   not   be   a   desirable   collateral   because   of   the   physical  
properties.  It  is  quite  possible  that  the  cost  of  sorting  and  selling  the  fresh  tomatoes  is  high,  
which   makes   them   a   non-­‐desirable   collateral.     Specialized   items   are   also   considered   as   a  
non  desirable  e.g.  it  could  be  difficult  to  find  a  buyer  for  lunar  roving  vehicles.    The  lender  
always   looks   for   items   as   collateral   with   very   stable   market   prices,   marketability   and  
desirable  physical  properties.    

FLOATING  INVENTORY  LIENS  


It  is  a  secured  short  term  loan  against  inventory  as  collateral  under  which  a  lender’s  claim  is  
on  the  borrower’s  inventory  in  general.  Businesses  with  stable  level  of  inventory  consisting  
of  diversified  group  of  inexpensive  merchandise,  find  the  arrangement  of  floating  inventory  
liens  very  attractive.  Examples  of  such  items  include,  screws  and  bolts,  shoes  and  auto  tires.  
Because  it  is  difficult  for  a  lender  to  verify  the  presence  of  inventory  consisting  of  diversified  
group   of   inexpensive   merchandise,   the   lender   extends   the   loan   equal   to   less   than   50  
percent  of  the  book  value  of  the  average  inventory.  Typically  the  rate  of  interest  charged  on  
floating  lien  is  3  –  5  percent  higher    than  the  prime  rate.  Floating  inventory  lien  loans  are  
available  from  commercial  banks  and  in  some  cases  also  from  finance  companies.  

TRUST  RECEIPT  INVENTORY  LOANS  


It   is   the   form   of   a   secured   short   term   loan   made   against   relatively   expensive   items   of  
inventory.   The   lender   advances   80   to   100   percent   of   the   book   value   of   the   average  
inventory   in   exchange   for   the   borrower’s   promise   to   repay   the   loan   as   well   as   accrued  
interest   immediately   after   the   sale   of   each   item   of   collateral.   The   lender   files   the   lien   on   all  
the   financed   items   of   inventory   and   releases   the   lien   on   each   item   after   its   sale   and  
remittance   of   amount   lent   plus   accrued   interest.   Periodic   checks   of   the   borrower’s  
inventory   are   required   by   the   lender   to   make   sure   that   the   required   amount   of   collateral  
are  still  on  hand.  The  interest  rate  on  Trust  receipt  inventory  loans  is  usually  2  percent  or  
more  above  the  prime  rate.    

Financial  Management     Page|  141    


 
 

WAREHOUSE  RECEIPT  LOANS  


A   warehouse   receipt   loan   is   a   secured   short   term   loan   against   inventory   under   which   the  
control   of   the   pledged   inventory   is   transferred   to   the   lender.   The   control   of   the   pledged  
inventory   is   sorted   by   a   designated   agent   on   the   behalf   of   lender.   After   selecting   the  
desired   inventory   items   as   collateral,   a   warehousing   company   is   hired   as   agent,   by   the  
lender  to  take  possession  of  the  selected  inventory.    

There   are   two   types   of   possible   warehousing;   a   terminal   warehouse   and   a   field   warehouse.  
A  terminal  warehouse  is  a  central  warehouse  of  the  lender  where  merchandise  of  various  
customers   (borrowers)   are   stored.   This   type   of   warehouse   is   used   when   the   pledged  
inventory  is  easily  transportable  and  inexpensive  to  transport.  A  field  warehouse  is  set  up  
on  the  borrowers  premises  or  the  designated  agent  lease  part  of  the  borrower’s  warehouse  
to  store  the  pledged  inventory.    Regardless  of  the  type  of  the  warehouse,  a  guard   over  the  
inventory   is   placed   by   the   designated   warehousing   company.   Pledged   inventory   could   be  
released  by  the  warehousing  company  only  with  the  written  permission  of  lender.  

The  requirements  for  the  release  of  inventory  are  stated  in  the  actual  lending  agreement.  
The   lender   only   selects   the   inventory   items   as   collateral   that   are   believed   to   be   readily  
marketable   and   only   extends   loan   equal   to   75   to   90   percent   of   the   average   collateral’s  
value.  The  cost  of  this  type  of  loan  is  higher  than  those  of  other  secured  short  term  loans  
because  a  warehousing  company  is  hired  and  paid  for  guarding  and  supervising  the  pledged  
inventory.     The   basic   rate   of   interest   on   warehouse   receipt   loans   range   from   3   to   5   percent  
above   the   prime   rate.   In   addition   to   the   higher   rate   of   interest,   the   borrower   pays   the  
insurance   costs   on   the   warehoused   pledged   inventory   and   also   absorbs   the   cost   of  
warehousing   in   the   form   of   warehousing   fee   which   is   typically   between   1   to   3   percent   of  
the  total  amount  of  extended  loan.      

TOPIC  SUMMARY  
Accounts  payable  and  accruals  are  the  two  forms  of  spontaneous  financing  for  a  business.  
The  key  objective  of  a  business  is  to  hold  the  cash  intended  to  pay  its  short  term  liabilities  
for  a  longer  possible  period  of  time.  This  enables  the  business  to  use  those  funds  for  its  own  
purposes  for  a  longer  time  period.  In  addition  to  this,  a  business  must  need  to  arrange  for  
short-­‐term   funds   to   balance   out   cash   flows   .   The   quantity   and   form   of   current   liabilities  
financing   should   be   provided   at   the   lowest-­‐cost   funds   with   the   least   risk.   The   strategy  
regarding   current   liabilities   is   expected   to   contribute   positively   to   the   value   maximization  
goal  of  a  business.  

Self-­‐Reflection  Questions  

1.What  are  the  two  key  sources  of  spontaneous  short-­‐term  financing  for  a  
business?  

Financial  Management     Page|  142    


 
 

2.  Is  there  a  cost  associated  with  taking  and  giving  up  a  cash  discount?  How  do  
short-­‐term  borrowing  costs  and  stretching  accounts  payable  effect  the  cost  of  
giving  up  a  cash  discount?    

3.    What  is  the  relationship  between  the  prime  rate  of  interest  and  the  short-­‐term  
bank  borrowing?  What  is  a  floating-­‐rate  loan?  

4.  Differentiate  between  a  line  of  credit  and  a  revolving  credit  agreement.    

5.  How  is  commercial  paper  used  to  raise  short-­‐term  funds?  Who  can  issue  
commercial  paper?  Who  buys  commercial  paper?  

6.  Compare  the  secured  and  unsecured  short-­‐term  loans  in  terms  of  riskiness  and  
interest  rates.  

7.  Describe  and  compare  the  basic  features  of  the  following  methods  of  using  
inventory  as  short  term  loan  collateral:  (i)  floating  lien  (ii)  trust  receipt  loan  (iii)  
warehouse  receipt  loan.  

8.  For  the  following  methods  of  using  accounts  receivable  to  obtain  short  term  
financing,  describe  the  basic  features  of  each  and  compare  them:  (i)  pledging  
accounts  receivable  (ii)  factoring  accounts  receivable.    

UNIT  5  –  REFERENCES  
Gitman,   Lawrence   J.   And   Chad   J.   Zutter   (2012)   Principles   of   managerial   finance,   13th   ed.     p.  
cm.  The  Prentice  Hall    

Lorenzo   P,   Argentina   and   Allende,     Sarria   (2010)     Working   Capital   Management,   Oxford  
university  press  Inc.  

Brealey,   R.A;   Myers,   S.C;   Allen,   F.   (2006)   Principles   of   corporate   finance,   6th   ed.    
dandelon.com  

Baker, H.  K ent  a nd  P owell,  G ary    ( 2009) Understanding Financial  M anagement: A


Practical Guide, black well publishing
Sagner,    James  (2011),  Essentials  of  Working  Capital  Management,  John  Wiley  and  sons.  Inc  

http://www.investopedia.com/terms/w/workingcapitalmanagement.asp  

UNIT  5  –  SUMMARY  
ASSIGNMENTS  AND  ACTIVITIES  
The  assignment  and  activities  covered  in  the  unit  four  will  enable  the  students  to  practice  
the  learned  techniques  of  short  term  funds  management.        

Financial  Management     Page|  143    


 
 

SUMMARY  
The   unit   describes   the   phenomenon   of   short-­‐term   funds   management.   It   focuses   on   the  
concept   of   net   working   capital   and   describes   the   cash   conversion   cycle   and   its   funding  
requirements.  Various  different  inventory  management  views  are  discussed  to  develop  an  
understand  of  the  commonly  used  techniques  of  inventory  management  system.  This  unit  
further,  looks  at  various  aspects  of  spontaneous  liabilities  management  and  both  unsecured  
and  secured  sources  of  short-­‐term  loans.  It  explains  in  detail  how  best  to  manage  them.  For  
example,   it   explains,   how   to   obtain   the   right   quantity   and   type   of   current   liabilities  
financing  with  minimum  cost  and  risk.    

   

Financial  Management     Page|  144    


 
 

FINAL  ASSIGNMENT/MAJOR  PROJECT  

The   final   assignment   is   to   be   set   by   the   participating   institutions.   It   is   recommended   that   the   final  
project  should  give  the  student  the  opportunity  to  demonstrate  their  competencies  any  of  the  units  that  
the   students   have   covered   in   this   course.   The   assignment   could   be   either   done   as   an   individual  
assignment  or  a  group  assignment.    

   

Financial  Management     Page|  145    


 
 

COURSE  SUMMARY  

TOPICS  LEARNED  

The  topics  and  concepts  that  have  been  covered  in  this  course  are  as  listed  below:  

Different  forms  of  business,  but  common  ones  are:  

• Sole  proprietorship    
• Partnership  
• Corporation    
 

Concepts  of  financial  management    

Financial  management  enables  managers  to  answer  questions  pertaining  to:  

• Long-­‐term  investments  
• Long  term  finances  
• Management  of  day  today  activities  

Three   financial   statements   are   important   for   gauging   the   health   of   the   company   by   both  
the  managers  and  investors:  

• Statement   of   comprehensive   income   –   summarises   the   overall   income   generated  


by  the  company  
• The   statement   of   financial   position  –  outlines   the   state   of   finances   of   a   company   in  
a  given  year,  usually  compared  over  2  periods  
• The  statement  of  cash  flows  –  analyses  the  cash  situation  of  the  company  

Financial  markets  and  institutions  

Five  major  financial  institutions  that  facilitate  flow  of  funds  

• Commercial  banks  
• Mutual  funds  
• Security  firms  
• Insurance  companies  
• Pension  funds  

Capital  markets      

• Bond  markets  
• Equity  markets  

Financial  Management     Page|  146    


 
 
Different  types  of  market  securities  

• Money  market  securities  


• Treasury  bills    
• Foreign  money  markets  
• Capital  markets  –  bonds,  stocks  
• Securities  exchange    -­‐  organised  and  over  the  counter  
• Derivative  securities  

Foreign  exchange  markets  –  stop  and  forward  

Financial  Statements  

The  health  of  the  company  is  gauged  using  financial  analysis  and  analysis  of  the  cash  flows  

Ratios  covered  in  the  financial  analysis:  

• Liquidity  ratios  
 
!"##$%&  !""#$"
Current  ratio  =      
!"#$%&  !"#$"!"%"&'
 
(!"##$%&  !""#$"  !    !"#$"%&'()
Quick  ratio  (acid  test  ratio)  =    
!"#$%&  !"#$"!"%"&'
 
• Profitability  ratios  
!"#  !"#$%&
Profit  margin  = x  100  
!"#$%

 
!"#$$  !"#$%&    
Gross  profit  Ratio  =   x100    
!"#$%

 
!"#$$  !"#$%&              
Mark  up  ratio  =     x100  
!"#$  !"  !""#$  !"#$

 
• Efficiency  Ratios  
!"#$  !"  !""#$  !"#$            
Stock  turnover  ratio    =      
!"#$%&'  !"#$%
!"#  !"#$%&
Return  on  assets  =      
!"#$%  !""#$"

 
𝐍𝐞𝐭  𝐢𝐧𝐜𝐨𝐦𝐞
Return  on  equity  =      
!"#$%  !"#$%&  
!"#$%&'  !"#$%  !"#$%&'
Trade  debtors  collection  period  =     x  365    
!"#$%&  !"#$!

Financial  Management     Page|  147    


 
 
!"#$%&'  !"#$%  !"#$%&'"(
Debt  collection  period  =     x  365    
!"#$%  !"#$%&  !"#$%&'('

• Investment  Ratios  
 
𝐧𝐞𝐭  𝐢𝐧𝐜𝐨𝐦𝐞
Earnings  per  share    =      
!"#$%&  !"  !"#$%&"'  !"#$%!
 
𝐦𝐚𝐫𝐤𝐞𝐭  𝐩𝐫𝐢𝐜𝐞  𝐩𝐞𝐫  𝐬𝐡𝐚𝐫𝐞
Price  earnings  ratio    =      
!"#$%$&'  !"#  !"#$%
   
𝐩𝐫𝐞𝐟𝐞𝐫𝐞𝐧𝐜𝐞  𝐬𝐡𝐚𝐫𝐞𝐬!𝐥𝐨𝐧𝐠!𝐭𝐞𝐫𝐦  𝐥𝐨𝐚𝐧𝐬
Capital  gearing  ratio    =      
!"#$%  !"#$%&'! !"#$%!!"#$  !"#$  !"#$%

There  are  three  types  of  cash  flows  –  operating  flows,  investment  flows  and  financing  flows.  

• Operating   Cash   flow   (generated   from   normal   trading)=   Net   profits   after   taxes+  
Depreciation  and  other  noncash  charges  

• Free  cash  flow  (cash  flow  available  to  investors)  =  Operating  Cash  Flow  -­‐Net  
fixed  asset  investment  -­‐  Net  current  asset  investment  
• net  fixed  asset  investment  (NFAI)  =  Change  in  net  fixed  assets  +Depreciation  
 

Two   methods   of   presenting   the   cash   flow   statement   –   direct   (based   on   the   cash   book  
summary)  and  indirect  based  on  the  profit  and  loss  and  the  balance  sheet.  

Financial  planning  

• The  different  types  of  financial  plans  –  strategic  and  operating    


• Cash   budget   and   forecasting   of   the   different   parts   of   the   budget   –   sales   forecast,  
cash   receipts,   cash   disbursements,   net   cash   flow,   ending   cash   flow,   financing   and  
excess  cash  

Financial  Management     Page|  148    


 
 
• Pro   forma   Financial   statements   as   tools   for   profit   planning   –   pro   forma     income  
statement,    cost  and  expenses,  pro  forma  balance  sheet  and  related  assumptions  

Short  term  funds  management  

• Working  capital  management:    


Net  working  capital  =  Current  assets  –  Current  liabilities  
 
Cash  conversion  cycle  (CCC) = OC − APP,  and  operating  cycle  (OC) = AAI + ACP)  
Where:  

OC  =  Operating  cycle  

AAI  =  Average  age  of  inventory    

ACP  =  Average  collection  period  

• Inventory  management  
a) Inventory  systems  –  ABC,    
b) Economic  order  quantity  
c) Computation  of  total  cost  and  economic  ordering  costs,  where:  
o Carrying  costs:  =  C  X  Q/2  
o Ordering  costs:    Order  cost = O  ×S/Q  
S Q
Total  cost = (O  × ) +   (C  × )  
Q 2
2  ×S  ×O
Economic  Ordering  Quantity   =  
C
d)  just  in  time  inventory  management,  
 
• Working  capital  management  
o Accounts  payable  and  credit  terms  and  the  cost  of  giving  up  discounts  
o Raising  cash  through  short  financing  

APPLICATION  OF  KNOWLEDGE  AND  SKILL  

Given  the  importance  of  managing  finance  for  the  success  of  the  business  and  realisation  of  
value   for   the   owners/share   holders,   this   course   has   equipped   you   with   financial  
management  survival  skills,  Whether  you  are  taking  this  course  to  seek  employment  in  the  
finance  sector  or  to  manage  the  finances    of  your  business,  you  will  find  that  this  course  has  
been  tailored  to  cater  for  your  financial  knowledge  needs.  Regardless  of  the  size  and  nature  
of  the    business  you  find  yourself  in  ,  you  will  find  that  the  skills  acquired  from  this  course  e  
are  equally  applicable.  

Financial  Management     Page|  149    


 
 

COURSE  EVALUATION  

The  end  of  course  evaluation  is  to  be  provided  by  the  participating  institutions.  

   

Financial  Management     Page|  150    


 
 

COURSE  APPENDICES  

Appendix  one  –  Solution  to  topic  3.2  (financial  analysis)  reflection  question  

Appendix  two:  Solution  to  unit  four  assignment      

   

Financial  Management     Page|  151    


 
 

APPENDIX  1  –    SOLUTION  TO    TOPIC  3.2  (FINANCIAL  ANALYSIS)  


 

Financial  Management     Page|  152    


 
 

Financial  Management     Page|  153    


 
 

Financial  Management     Page|  154    


 
 

APPENDIX  2:  UNIT  FOUR  ASSIGNMENT’S    SOLUTION  

i)  Cash  budget  

  Accounts  
Cash  Budget   receivable  at  
March  –  May   end  of  May  
  Jan   Feb   Mar     Apr     May   Jun   Jul  
000   000   000     000     000  
Sales  forecast     500   600   400     200     200    
Cash  sales  (30  %)   150   180   120     60     60    
Collection  of  A/R                  
Lagged  1  month      
245   294     196     98   98    
[(0.7  ×  0.7)  =  0.49]  
Lagged  2  month      
  105     126     84   42   42  
(0.3  ×  0.7)  =  0.21]  
Total  cash  receipts         519     382     242          140  +  42=  182  
Less:                    
Total  cash  disbursements     600   500   200  
Net  cash  flow       (81)     (118)     42    
Add:  Beginning  cash         115     34     (84)    
Ending  cash       34     (84)     (42)    

Less:                    
Minimum  cash  balance   25   25   25  
Required  total  financing                    
(notes  Payable)   -­‐   109   67  
Excess  cash  balance                  
 (marketable  securities)   9   -­‐   -­‐  
 
 

 ii)  The  company  would  need  a  maximum  of  109  in  financing  over  the  3  –  month  period.  
 
 
iii)  Pro-­‐forma  balance  sheet  
Account   Amount   Source  of  amount  
Cash     25          Minimum  cash  balance  –  May  
Notes  payable   67     Required  total  financing  –  May    
Marketable  securities   0     Excess  cash  balance  –  June  
Accounts  receivable     182     Calculation  at  right  of  cash  budget  statement  
 

155  |  P a g e  
 
 
iv)  Pro-­‐forma  income  statement  Year  2013  

Income  Statement  
for  the  Year  Ended  December  31,  2012  
Sales  revenue  (given)   3,900,000  
Less:  Cost  of  goods  sold  (55%)   2,145,000  
Gross  profits     1,755,000  
Less:  Operating  expenses  (12%)   468,000  
Operating  profits     1,287,000  
Less:  Interest  expense(given)   325,000  
Net  profits  before  taxes      962,000  
Less:  Taxes  (40%)   384,800  
Net  profits  after  taxes      577,200  
Less:  Cash  dividends  (given)   320,000  
To  retained  earnings     257,200  
 
v)  The  percent  of  sales  method  assumes  that  all  costs  are  variable  so  it  may  underestimate  
actual  2013  pro-­‐firma  income.  If  the  business  has  fixed  costs,  which  does  not  increase  with  
increasing   sales   then   the   pro-­‐forma   income   for   year   2013   would   probably   be  
underestimated.    

156  |  P a g e  
 

You might also like